Fuji Electric FRENIC-Ace Series User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Fuji Electric Manuals
  4. Inverter
  5. FRENIC-Ace series
  6. User manual
Fuji Electric FRENIC-Ace Series User Manual

Fuji Electric FRENIC-Ace Series User Manual

High-performance inverter
Hide thumbs Also See for FRENIC-Ace Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
Table Of Contents
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Ace series of high-performance standard inverters.
•
This product is designed to drive a three-phase motor under variable speed control. Read through this
user's manual and become familiar with the handling procedure for correct use.
•
Incorrect handling may hinder normal operation, or result in a shortening of the product life or failure.
•
Deliver this manual to the end user of this product.
•
Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded.
•
For how to use an optional device, refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device.
The Japanese version of this document can be downloaded from the following site.
https://www.fujielectric.co.jp/products/drive-download/
The English version of this document can be downloaded from the following site.
https://www.fujielectric.com/products/drive-download/
中文版的这个文件可以从以下站点下载。 The Chinese version of this document can be downloaded from the
following site.
https://www.fujielectric.com.cn/download_list.php
High-Performance Inverter
User's Manual
24A7-E-0174a

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the FRENIC-Ace Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Fuji Electric FRENIC-Ace Series

Summary of Contents for Fuji Electric FRENIC-Ace Series

  • Page 1 High-Performance Inverter User's Manual Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Ace series of high-performance standard inverters. • This product is designed to drive a three-phase motor under variable speed control. Read through this user's manual and become familiar with the handling procedure for correct use.
  • Page 3 Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the content of this manual, however, please contact your dealer or relevant Fuji Electric sales office at the end of this manual if there is anything that is unclear, or if any...
  • Page 5 This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-Ace series of inverters including its operating procedure and selection of peripheral equipment. Read this User's Manual carefully beforehand to ensure correct use.
  • Page 6 How this manual is organized This manual is configured as follows. Chapter 1 BEFORE USE This chapter describes the items to be checked before the use of the inverter. Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the important points in installing and wiring inverters. Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter keypad operation.
  • Page 7 CONTENTS Chapter 1 BEFORE USE Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) ···························································· 1-1 Product External Appearance ······························································································· 1-4 Precautions for Using Inverters ···························································································· 1-6 1.3.1 Operating environment ································································································· 1-6 1.3.2 Storage environment ···································································································1-11 [ 1 ] Temporary storage ······································································································1-11 [ 2 ] Long-term storage ······································································································1-11 1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment ··························································...
  • Page 8 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Names and Functions of Keypad Components ········································································ 3-1 Overview of Operation Modes ······························································································ 3-4 Running mode ·················································································································· 3-6 3.3.1 Running status monitoring ····························································································· 3-6 3.3.2 Monitoring warnings ····································································································· 3-8 3.3.3 Running or stopping the motor with the keypad ·································································· 3-9 3.3.4 Setting the reference frequency from the keypad ································································...
  • Page 9 4.8.1 Driving an Induction Motor (Induction motor) ··································································· 4-14 [ 1 ] If running the motor with simple V/f control ······································································ 4-14 [ 2 ] If running the motor with V/f control with sensor ······························································· 4-15 [ 3 ] If running the motor with V/f control with slip compensation, dynamic torque vector control, or sensorless vector control ·····························································································...
  • Page 10 [ 14 ] d2 codes: Application Functions 2 ················································································· 5-40 [ 15 ] U codes: Customizable Logic ······················································································· 5-41 [ 16 ] U1 codes: Customizable Logic ····················································································· 5-46 [ 17 ] y codes: LINK Functions ····························································································· 5-47 [ 18 ] o code: Option Functions ····························································································· 5-49 [ 19 ] o1 codes: Option Functions ·························································································...
  • Page 11 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ················································································ 6-3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor ········································································· 6-4 6.3.1 Alarm code list ············································································································ 6-4 6.3.2 Alarm causes, checks and measures ··············································································· 6-7 [ 1 ] Ca1 to Ca5 User-defined alarm ···················································································· 6-7 [ 2 ] Cof Current input terminals [C1], [C2] signal line break ······················································...
  • Page 12 [ 3 ] lif Lifetime early warning ························································································· 6-30 [ 4 ] OH Cooling fin overheat early warning ··········································································· 6-30 [ 5 ] Ol Motor overload early warning ·················································································· 6-30 [ 6 ] pid PID alarm output ································································································ 6-30 [ 7 ] pTC PTC thermistor activate ·······················································································...
  • Page 13 7.7.1 Inquiry request ·········································································································· 7-13 7.7.2 Product warranty ······································································································· 7-13 [ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range ·························································· 7-13 [ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc. ································································ 7-14 [ 3 ] Repair period after production stoppage, spare parts supply period (maintenance period)········· 7-14 [ 4 ] Delivery conditions ·····································································································...
  • Page 14 9.1.2 Terminal specifications ·································································································· 9-3 [ 1 ] RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) ··················································· 9-3 [ 2 ] RS-485 communication port 2 ························································································ 9-3 9.1.3 Connection method ······································································································ 9-4 9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices ··························································································· 9-6 [ 1 ] Converter ···················································································································...
  • Page 15 10.3 Equations for Selections ··································································································· 10-6 10.3.1 Load torque calculation when running at constant speed···················································· 10-6 [ 1 ] General equation ······································································································· 10-6 [ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F ······················································································ 10-6 10.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation ································································· 10-8 [ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia ····················································································...
  • Page 16 11.6.4 Peripheral equipment ································································································ 11-56 11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) ······································································································· 11-61 11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) ······································································································· 11-64 11.9 Output Circuit Filters ······································································································· 11-67 11.10 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) ························································· 11-69 11.11 External Cooling Attachments ··························································································· 11-70 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview ···································································· 11-72 11.12.1 Adapter for option card installation ···············································································...
  • Page 17 A.2.1 Inverter operating principles and noise ·································································· Appendix-2 A.2.2 Types of noise ·································································································· Appendix-3 Measures ········································································································ Appendix-4 A.3.1 Noise prevention prior to installation ····································································· Appendix-4 A.3.2 Implementation of noise prevention measures ························································ Appendix-4 A.3.3 Noise prevention examples ················································································· Appendix-8 Appendix B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters ··········································································...
  • Page 18 ■ Safety precautions Be sure to read this User's Manual thoroughly prior to installation, wiring (connection), operation, maintenance, or inspection to ensure correct use of the product. Furthermore, ensure a thorough understanding of device knowledge, safety information, as well as all related precautions. Safety precautions contained in this User's Manual have been categorized as follows.
  • Page 19 Wiring • If no zero-phase current (earth leakage current) detective device such as a ground-fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system's shutdown undesirable to factory operation, install a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only.
  • Page 20 Operation • Be sure to attach the inverter surface cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the surface cover while the power is ON. • Do not operate the unit with wet hands. Failure to observe this could result in electric shock. •...
  • Page 21 Speed control mode • If the control constant for the automatic speed regulator (ASR) used with speed control is not at an appropriate value, even if the operation command is turned OFF, deceleration control may not be performed, and stop conditions may not be met due to such reasons as hunting caused by a high gain setting.

  • Page 22: General Precautions

    Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement • Carry out inspection after waiting 5 minutes or longer after turning OFF the power. Furthermore, ensure that the LED monitor and charge lamp are OFF, and use a device such as a tester to ensure that the DC intermediate circuit voltage across main circuit terminals [P(+)] and [N(-)] has dropped to a safe level (+25 VDC or less).

  • Page 23: Before Use

    Chapter 1 BEFORE USE This chapter describes the items to check before the use of the inverter. Contents Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) ················································· 1-1 Product External Appearance ··················································································· 1-4 Precautions for Using Inverters ················································································· 1-6 1.3.1 Operating environment ····················································································· 1-6 1.3.2 Storage environment ······················································································...

  • Page 25: Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates And Inverter Type)

    1.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) Unpack the package and check the following: The package contains both the inverter unit and instruction manual, and the product has suffered no damage (breakage, dents, parts that have fallen off) during transport. The Main nameplate is attached to the inverter at the location shown in Figure 1.2-1.
  • Page 26 1.1 Acceptance Inspection (Nameplates and Inverter Type) ■ Functional differences by construction type The FRENIC-Ace series of inverters has different functions depending on the construction type. The main differences are listed in the table below.  For other differences, refer to Chapter 12 “12.2 Common Specifications.”...
  • Page 27 1st week of January. The 1st week of January is indicated as '01.' Production year: Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
  • Page 28 1.2 Product External Appearance Product External Appearance Overall External Appearance Sub-nameplate (inside of cover) Control circuit Keypad terminal block Front cover Front cover Main circuit terminal block Main nameplate Warning plate Wiring guide (a) FRN0006E3S-2G Control circuit Cooling fan terminal block Main circuit terminal block Keypad...
  • Page 29 1.2 Product External Appearance Warning plate and label (a) FRN0001 to 0020E3□2G, (b) FRN0030 to 0115E3□2G FRN0002 to 0012E3□4G, FRN0022 to 0072E3□4G FRN0001 to 0012E3□7G Warning label Warning plate Warning label Figure 1.2-2 Warning plate and label...

  • Page 30: Precautions For Using Inverters

    1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters Precautions for Using Inverters This section provides precautions when applying inverters, e.g. precautions for installation environment, power supply lines, wiring, and connection to peripheral equipment. Be sure to observe these precautions. 1.3.1 Operating environment Install FRENIC-Ace in an environment that satisfies the operating environment requirements listed in Table1.3-1. Table1.3-1 Operating environment Item Specifications...
  • Page 31 1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters Item Specifications 2 to less than 9 9 to less than 20 20 to less than 55 55 to less Vibration Type of inverter than 200 Hz FRN0001 to 0115E3□-2G 3 mm mm (Max. 9.8 m/s 5.9 m/s 1 m/s FRN0002 to 0072E3□-4G...
  • Page 32 1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters 【FRN-E3S (Basic type), FRN-E3N (Ethernet built-in type)】 (*1) FRN0002/0004E3▲-2G (HND mode) and FRN0059E3■-4G (*2) FRN0012/0020E3▲-2G (HND mode) and FRN0007/0012E3■-4G (HND mode) (*3) FRN0004E3▲-7G to FRN0012E3▲-7G (HND mode) ■: S (Basic type) or N (Ethernet built-in type) or E (EMC filter built-in type) ▲: S (Basic type) or N (Ethernet built-in type) 【FRN-E3E (EMC filter built-in type)】...
  • Page 33 For details, refer to the Fuji Electric technical information “Design of Panels” or consult your Fuji Electric representative. The special environments listed below require using specially-designed panels or consideration of the panel installation location.
  • Page 34 1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters Environments Possible problems Sample measures Applicable industries Fumigation for export Halogen compounds such • When exporting an inverter Exporting. packaging as methyl bromide used in built within paneling or fumigation corrodes some attached to other parts inside the inverter.

  • Page 35: Storage Environment

    1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1.3.2 Storage environment The storage environment in which the inverter should be stored after purchase differs from the usage environment. Store the FRENIC-Ace in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below. [ 1 ] Temporary storage Table 1.3-3 Storage and transport environments Item...
  • Page 36 1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1.3.3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment [ 1 ] Phase-advancing capacitors for power factor correction Do not mount a phase-advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter's input (primary) or output (secondary) circuit. Mounting it in the input (primary) circuit has no effect. To correct the inverter power factor, use an optional DC reactor (DCR).
  • Page 37 1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters [ 5 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) / residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) / earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring.

  • Page 38: Noise Reduction

    1.3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1.3.4 Noise reduction If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below. If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires: •...
  • Page 39 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes the important points in installing and wiring inverters. Contents Installation ············································································································ 2-1 2.1.1 Installation environment ···················································································· 2-1 2.1.2 Installation surface ·························································································· 2-1 2.1.3 Surrounding space ·························································································· 2-1 Wiring ················································································································· 2-3 2.2.1 Basic connection diagrams ··············································································· 2-3 [ 1 ] FRN-E3S-2G/4G/7G, FRN-E3E-4G/7G ································································...

  • Page 41: Installation Environment

    2.1 Installation Installation 2.1.1 Installation environment Please install FRENIC-Ace in locations which meet the conditions specified in Chapter 1 “1.3.1 Operating environment.” 2.1.2 Installation surface Please install the inverter on non-combustibles such as metal. Also, do not mount it upside down or horizontally. Install on non-combustibles such as metal.
  • Page 42 2.1 Installation ■ Installation with external cooling External heat dissipation The external cooling reduces the generated heat inside the paneling by (70%) Internal heat dissipating approximately 70% of the total heat generated (total heat dissipation Cooling fan (30%) loss) through the cooling fins protruding outside the equipment or cabinet.
  • Page 43 2.2 Wiring Wiring 2.2.1 Basic connection diagrams [ 1 ] FRN-E3S-2G/4G/7G, FRN-E3E-4G/7G External braking resistor（DBR） (CM) DC reactor(DCR) (THR) Circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current- Main circuit operated protective device (RCD)/ earth leakage circuit Magnetic P(+) N(-) breaker (ELCB) Power supply Motor contactor(MC) Thermal...
  • Page 44 2.2 Wiring (*1) Install the molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB) (with overcurrent protective function) recommended for each inverter on the input (primary) circuit for wiring protection. Do not use a circuit breaker that exceeds the recommended rated current. (*2) Install recommended magnetic contactors (MC) as necessary on each inverter as these will be used to disconnect the inverter from the power supply separately from the MCCB or RCD/ELCB.
  • Page 45 2.2 Wiring [ 2 ] FRN-E3N-2J/4J/7G External braking resistor（DBR） (CM) Circuit breaker DC reactor(DCR) (THR) (MCCB) or residual- current-operated Main circuit protective device (RCD)/ earth leakage circuit Magnetic P(+) N(-) Thermal breaker (ELCB) contactor(MC) Motor Power supply overload 3-phase L1/R 200 V system L2/S 200 to 480 V...
  • Page 46 2.2 Wiring (*1) Install the molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB) (with overcurrent protective function) recommended for each inverter on the input (primary) circuits for wiring protection. Do not use a circuit breaker that exceeds the recommended rated current.
  • Page 47 2.2 Wiring Route the wiring following the steps below (the descriptions assume that the inverter has already been installed). 2.2.2 Removal and attachment of the front cover and wiring guide If using the RS-485 communication cable for such purposes as remotely operating the keypad, always remove the RS-485 communication cable from the RJ-45 connector before removing the front cover.

  • Page 48: Precautions For Wiring

    2.2 Wiring 2.2.3 Precautions for wiring Pay attention to the following when wiring. Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the input voltage range described on the Main nameplate. Always connect the power lines to the inverter main power input terminals [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] (three- phase) or [L1/L], [L2/N] (single-phase).
  • Page 49 2.2 Wiring ■ Handling the Wiring Guide The wiring space may become insufficient when routing the main circuit wires, depending on the wire material used. In these cases, the relevant cut-off sections (refer to the figures below) can be removed using a pair of nippers to secure routing space.

  • Page 50: Precautions For Long Wiring (Between Inverter And Motor)

    For motors with encoders, the wiring length between the inverter and motor should be below 100 m (328 ft). This restriction comes from the encoder specifications. For distances beyond 100 m (328 ft), insulation converters should be used. Please contact Fuji Electric when operating with wiring lengths beyond the upper limit.
  • Page 51 2.2 Wiring • Connect to the power supply via a molded case circuit breaker or residual-current-operated protective device/earth leakage circuit breaker (with overcurrent protection function) for each inverter. Use recommended molded case circuit breakers and earth leakage breakers and do not use breakers which exceed the recommended rated current.

  • Page 52: Main Circuit Terminals

    2.2 Wiring 2.2.5 Main circuit terminals The specifications for the screws used in the main circuit wiring and the wire sizes are shown below. Exercise caution as the terminal position varies depending on inverter capacity. In the diagram in “[[ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (main circuit terminal)],”...

  • Page 53: Terminal Layout Diagram (Main Circuit Terminal)

    2.2 Wiring [ 2 ] Terminal layout diagram (main circuit terminal) The dimensions for each terminal indicate the “dimensions between walls” as shown in the diagram on the left. Figure A Figure B Single-phase 200V series: L1/R⇒L1/L, L3/T⇒L2/N Single-phase 200V series: L1/R⇒L1/L, L3/T⇒L2/N Figure C Figure D Single-phase 200V series: L1/R⇒L1/L, L3/T⇒L2/N...
  • Page 54 2.2 Wiring Figure I Figure J Figure K (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) L1/L L2/N P(+) N(-) (0.31) (0.31) 2-14...

  • Page 55: Recommended Wire Size (Main Circuit Terminals)

    2.2 Wiring The following terminals will have high voltage when power is ON. Main circuit: [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T], [L1/L], [L2/N], [P1], [P(+)], [N(-)], [DB], [U], [V], [W], [R0], [T0], AUX-contact ([30A], [30B], [30C]) Insulation level Main circuit - Casing: Basic insulation (overvoltage category III, degree of contamination 2) Main circuit - Control circuit: Enhanced insulation (overvoltage category III, degree of contamination 2) Contact output –...
  • Page 56 2.2 Wiring □ Ambient temperature: 50°C (122°F)° and below Table2.2-3 Wire sizes (Main power supply input and inverter output) HHD: Heavy-duty load HND: General load HHD: Heavy-duty load Recommended wire size (mm Main power supply input Inverter For DC reactor For braking resistor [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] Ground terminal...
  • Page 57 2.2 Wiring HND: General load Recommended wire size (mm Main power supply input [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] For DC For braking Inverter reactor resistor Ground terminal Output connection connection With DC reactor (DCR) Without DC reactor (DCR) [U], [V], [W] [P1], [P(+)] [P(+)], [DB] Inverter type Allowable...
  • Page 58 2.2 Wiring □ Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F) and below Table 2.2-4 Wire sizes (Main power supply input and inverter output) HHD: Heavy-duty load HND: General load HHD: Heavy-duty load Recommended wire size (mm Main power supply input [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] Inverter For DC reactor For braking...
  • Page 59 2.2 Wiring HND: General load Recommended wire size (mm Main power supply input Inverter For braking resistor [L1/R], [L2/S, [L3/T] For DC reactor Ground terminal Output connection connection[P1], [P(+)] With DC reactor Without DC reactor [U], [V], [W] [P(+)], [DB] (DCR) (DCR) Inverter type...
  • Page 60 2.2 Wiring HD: Heavy duty load Recommended wire size (mm Main power supply input Inverter For DC reactor For braking resistor [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] Ground terminal Output connection connection With DC reactor Without DC reactor [U], [V], [W] [P1], [P(+)] [P(+)], [DB] (DCR) (DCR)

  • Page 61: Description Of Terminal Functions (Main Circuit Terminal)

    2.2 Wiring [ 4 ] Description of terminal functions (main circuit terminal) Classification Terminal symbol Terminal name Specification [L1/R], [L2/S], Main power Terminals to connect three-phase power source. [L3/T] supply input (Three-phase models only) Main power Terminals to connect single-phase power source. [L1/L], [L2/N] supply input (Single-phase models only)
  • Page 62 Failure to observe this could result in fire. (5) Direct current bus terminals [P(+)], [N(-)] The direct current intermediate circuit of other inverters and PWM converters can be connected. Contact your Fuji Electric representative when using the direct current bus terminals [P(+)], [N(-)]. 2-22...
  • Page 63 2.2 Wiring (6) Main power supply input terminals [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] (three-phase input models) or [L1/L], [L2/N] (single-phase input models) Connect a three-phase power supply to three-phase input models. Connect a single-phase power supply to single- phase input models. 1) For safety reasons, check in advance that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD) or magnetic contactor (MC) on the main power supply wiring is off.
  • Page 64 2.2 Wiring When connecting with the PWM converter, do not connect power source directly to the inverter’s control power auxiliary input terminals ([R0], [T0]). Insert an insulating transformer or the auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor on the power supply side. For connection examples for the PWM converter side, refer to the instruction manual of the PWM converter.

  • Page 65: Wiring Procedure

    2.2 Wiring 2.2.6 Control circuit terminals [ 1 ] Recommended wire size (control circuit terminals) The wire sizes to be used for control circuit wiring are shown below. The control circuit terminal block is the same regardless of the inverter capacity. Table 2.2-5 Recommended wire sizes Rod terminal Removal size of...
  • Page 66 2.2 Wiring When pressing the lever to insert or remove the rod terminal, refer to the figure below, pay attention to the angle of the screwdriver, and do not apply excessive force suddenly. Pressing force: 25 ±5 N Screwdriver insertion angle: 66° Lever *Recommended insertion force by wire size: 0.25 mm...
  • Page 67 2.2 Wiring The following terminals will have high voltage when power is ON. Control terminals: AUX-contact ([30A], [30B], [30C]) Insulation level Contact output – Control circuit: Enhanced insulation (overvoltage category II, degree of contamination 2) Failure to observe this could result in electric shock. ...

  • Page 68: Description Of Terminal Functions (Control Circuit Terminal)

    2.2 Wiring [ 3 ] Description of terminal functions (control circuit terminal) Table below shows the functional explanations for the control circuit terminals. The connection method of the control circuit terminals differs depending on the functional code setting matching the purpose of inverter operation. Properly route wires such that the impact of noise generated by the main circuit wiring is reduced.
  • Page 69 2.2 Wiring Table2.2-7 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals (continued) Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol (1) Frequency is set according to the external analog voltage input command [C1] Analog setup value. voltage input SW3 and SW4 (refer to “2.2.7 Switching switches”) must be switched on the (C1 function) PCB.
  • Page 70 2.2 Wiring Table2.2-7 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals (continued) Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol The terminal is the common terminal for analog input signals (terminals [12], [13], [11] Analog input [C1], [FM1], [FM2]). The terminal is insulated from terminals [CM], [CMY]. common •...
  • Page 71 2.2 Wiring Digital input terminal Table 2.2-8 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol Digital input 1 (1) Various signals (coast to a stop command, external alarm, multi-speed [X1] selection, etc) set up by function codes E01 to E05, E98, E99 can be set. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “FUNCTION CODES.”...
  • Page 72 2.2 Wiring Table 2.2-8 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals (continued) Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol (1) When terminals [EN1]-[PLC] or terminals [EN2]-[PLC] are OFF, the inverter [EN1] Enable input output transistors stop switching (safe torque off: STO). [EN2] Be sure to operate terminals [EN1] and [EN2] simultaneously;...
  • Page 73 (SW1) is on the SINK side and circuit (b) shows the circuit configuration when the switch is on the SOURCE side. Caution: Use a relay which will not have contact failures (high contact reliability). (Fuji Electric’s control relay type: HH54PW) <Control circuit block> <Control circuit block> [PLC]...
  • Page 74 2.2 Wiring Analog output/Pulse output/Transistor output/Contact output terminals Table 2.2-10 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol [FM1] *1 Analog input This terminal outputs an analog direct current voltage DC0 to 10 V or analog direct current DC4 to 20 mA (DC0 to 20mA) monitor signal.
  • Page 75 2.2 Wiring Table 2.2-10 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals (continued) Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol (1) Various signals (running signal, frequency reached signal, overload forecast [Y1] Transistor signal, etc) set up by function code E20, E21 can be output. For details, refer output 1 to Chapter 5 “FUNCTION CODES.”...
  • Page 76 2.2 Wiring Table 2.2-10 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals (continued) Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol (1) When the inverter stops due to an alarm, output is generated on the relay [30A] Batch alarm contact (1C). output [30B] Contact rating: AC250 V 0.3 A cosφ = 0.3, DC48 V 0.5 A [30C] (2) With the function code E27, you can select and output the same signals as...
  • Page 77 2.2 Wiring RS-485 communication connector Table 2.2-13 Functional descriptions of control circuit terminals Terminal Terminal name Functional description symbol The keypad relay adapter CBAD-CP (optional) becomes RS-485 RJ-45 RS-485 communication port 1 when installed, and can be used for the following connector communication purposes.
  • Page 78 2.2 Wiring 2.2.7 Switching switches Switching the various switches should be conducted after more than 5 minutes has elapsed since power is shut off. Confirm that the LED monitor and the charge lamp are turned off, and that the direct current intermediate circuit voltage between the main circuit terminals [P(+)]-[N(-)] is below the safe voltage (below DC+25 V) with a tester before switching the switches.
  • Page 79 2.2 Wiring Switch Functional description Symbol <Switch to change the RS-485 communication port 2 terminating resistor (RS-485 communication port (on the terminal board))> Move the switch to the ON position when the inverter is located at either end of the communication network.
  • Page 80 2.2 Wiring For the switch locations on the control PCB, refer to “Figure 2.2-13 E3S/E3E terminal block and switches on PCB” and “Figure 2.2-14 E3N terminal block and switches on PCB.” Table 2.2-18 Switching positions and default settings of the switches SINK FMV2 Variation...

  • Page 81: Attachment Procedure

    2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad Attachment and Connection of Keypad 2.3.1 Parts required for connection The following parts are necessary when attaching the keypad to locations other than the inverter main body. Part name Type Remarks Keypad extension cable (Note 1) CB-5S，CB-3S，CB-1S Three lengths available (5 m, 3 m, 1 m) (3.3 ft, 9.8 ft, 16.4 ft)
  • Page 82 2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad ■ Attachment to the paneling Squeeze the hooks (2) shown in Figure 2.3 4 and pull the keypad towards you to remove it. Hooks Figure 2.3-4 Removal of the keypad Attach the relay connector of the CBAD-CP to the inverter main body. (Refer to Figure 2.3 5.) Relay connector Figure 2.3 5 Attachment of the relay connector Attach the rear mounting adapter of the CBAD-CP to the keypad main body.
  • Page 83 2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad Cut the paneling to attach the keypad, as shown in Figure 2.3-7. (Unit: mm) Cabinet opening to cut Cabinet cut dimensions (arrow A) Figure 2.3-7 Fixing screw positions and the dimensions of the paneling to cut Fix the keypad to the cabinet using 2 keypad rear cover fixing screws.
  • Page 84 2.3 Attachment and Connection of Keypad Connect the extended cable for remote operation (CB-5S, CB-3S, CB-1S) or the commercially available LAN cable (straight) to the keypad RJ-45 connector and the inverter main body RJ-45 connector (modular jack). (Refer to Figure 2.3-9.) RJ-45 connector (modular jack) Cabinet...
  • Page 85 2.4 USB port USB port There is a port (Mini-B) for USB cable connection on the surface of the inverter. Open the port cover as shown in the figure below to connect a USB cable. USB connection port cover USB cable Use a cable with a connector of 12 mm (0.47 in.) or less 12 mm (0.47 in.) 12㎜...

  • Page 87: Operation Using The Keypad

    Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter keypad operation. In addition to the keypad attached to the inverter main body (TP-M3), the optional remote operation keypad (TP- E2) and multi-function keypad (TP-A2SW) may also be used. Unless otherwise noted, this manual describes the operation of the keypad attached to the inverter main body.
  • Page 88 3.5.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of an alarm ·········································· 3-43 3.5.4 Switching to Programming mode ······································································· 3-43 About the display content of Ethernet built-in type (E3N) ··············································· 3-44...

  • Page 89: Names And Functions Of Keypad Components

    3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components Names and Functions of Keypad Components The keypad allows you to run and stop the inverter, display various data, configure function code data, and monitor I/O signal states, maintenance information and alarm information. 7-segment LED monitor UP key RUN key...
  • Page 90 3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components LED Indicator Item Functions and Keys ■ In Running mode: Functions assigned with function code E70 can be used. Hold down (for 1 second) to turn the function ON and OFF The function is always OFF when the power is turned ON.
  • Page 91 3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components Table 3.1-2 7-segment LED monitor display Character LED indicator Character LED indicator Character LED indicator Character LED indicator I or i T or t C or c U or u V or v O or o G or g H or h...

  • Page 92: Overview Of Operation Modes

    3.2 Overview of Operation Modes Overview of Operation Modes The FRENIC-Ace features the following three operation modes. Table 3.2-1 Operation modes Operation mode Description When powered ON, the inverter automatically enters this mode. This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency, PID command value, etc., and run/stop the motor with the keys.
  • Page 93 3.2 Overview of Operation Modes Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time. The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a “+” letter between the keys throughout this manual. For example, the expression “ keys” stands for pressing the key with the key held down .

  • Page 94: Running Mode

    3.3 Running mode Running mode 3.3.1 Running status monitoring In Running mode, the 17 items listed below in Table 3.3-1 can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is turned on, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the key to switch between monitor items.
  • Page 95 3.3 Running mode Table 3.3-1 Monitor items (continued) Display sample on Function code Monitor items LED indicator Unit Meaning of displayed value the LED E43 data monitor An analog input to the inverter in a format suitable for a desired scale. Analog input monitor Refer to the following function codes.
  • Page 96 3.3 Running mode 3.3.2 Monitoring warnings When the inverter identifies abnormal states, alarms are separated into alarms, with which the inverter immediately trips, and warnings, with which the operation continues and a warning is output (display and general- purpose output terminal). When a warning occurs, the running status monitor (frequency, etc.) and the warning code* are displayed alternatively on the LED monitor.
  • Page 97 3.3 Running mode 3.3.3 Running or stopping the motor with the keypad By factory default, pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the key decelerates the motor to stop. The key is enabled only in Running mode. When the inverter is running, the RUN LED lights up.

  • Page 98: Setting Up Pid Commands From The Keypad

    3.3 Running mode • To set the reference frequency, first press the key once. When the last digit blinks, each time key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next higher digit where data can be changed. This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data of large values.
  • Page 99 3.3 Running mode Table 3.3-3 PID process command manually set with keys and requirements PID control PID control Multistep (Operation (Remote LED monitor frequency mode Display when keys are on command) “PID-SS2”, selection) “PID-SS2” PID process command by keypad 1 or 2 Other than 0 Other than 0 PID process command currently selected...

  • Page 100: Settings Under Pid (Dancer) Control

    3.3 Running mode [ 2 ] Settings under PID (dancer) control To enable the PID (dancer) control, you need to set the J01 data to “3.” In the PID control mode, the content that can be specified and checked using the keys changes depending on the LED monitor content.
  • Page 101 3.3 Running mode Setting up the primary frequency setting with keys under PID dancer control When function code F01 is set to “0” ( keys on keypad) and Frequency setting 1 is selected as a primary frequency setting (when disabling the frequency setting via communications link, multistep frequency setting, and PID control), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the primary frequency setting with the keys.
  • Page 102 3.3 Running mode 3.3.6 Performing jogging operations with the keypad This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor using the keypad. If operation is set by external signal (function code F02 = 1), jogging cannot be performed using the keypad.

  • Page 103: Switching Between Remote And Local Modes

    3.3 Running mode 3.3.7 Switching between remote and local modes During normal operation, the inverter operates under remote mode and uses the operation method set to the inverter. During maintenance mode, the mode switches to local mode and the inverter is operated using the keypad.
  • Page 104 3.3 Running mode 3.3.8 Shift key function assignment In Running mode, various functions can be assigned to the Shift key, as with the digital input terminals, based on the function code E70 setting. One of these functions is the switching function between remote and local modes mentioned above.
  • Page 105 3.4 Programming mode Programming mode The Programming mode provides you with the following functions--setting and checking function code data, monitoring maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can be easily selected with the menu-driven system. Table 3.4-1 below lists menus available in Programming mode. The leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.

  • Page 106: Programming Mode

    3.4 Programming mode 3.4.1 Setting function codes: “Data Setting: 1.f__ through 1.k__” Menu number 1 “Data Setting” (1.f__ through 1.K__) in Programming mode allows you to configure all function codes. Figure 3.4-1 shows the Menu transition and function code data change procedure in “Data Setting” menu. Programming mode Function code list Function code data...
  • Page 107 3.4 Programming mode When changing function code data, press the key once the lowest digit blinks. After that, each time key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next higher digit where data can be changed. This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits.
  • Page 108 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.2 Checking changed function codes: “Data Checking: 2.rep” Menu number 2 “Data Checking” (2.rep) in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor.
  • Page 109 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.3 Monitoring the running status: “Drive Monitoring: 3.ope” Menu number 3 “Drive Monitoring” (3.ope) is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and test running. Table 3.4-2 “Drive Monitoring” display items Monitor Item Unit Description Output frequency 1 Output frequency before slip compensation 3_00 3_01...
  • Page 110 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-2 “Drive Monitoring” display items (continued) Monitor Item Unit Description 3_22 Flux command Displays the flux command value. For details, refer to “◼ Displaying the running status 3_23 Running status 2 (3_07) and running status 2 (3_23)”. SY synchronization Displays the positioning deviation (angle) for master- 3_25...
  • Page 111 3.4 Programming mode ◼ Displaying the running status (3_07) and running status 2 (3_23) To display the running status and running status 2 in 4-digit hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3.4-3 and Table 3.4-4 respectively. Table 3.4-5 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display.

  • Page 112: Table Of Contents

    3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-4 Running status 2 (3_23) bit assignment Symbol Content Symbol Content 1 when performing speed control (during torque control) Driving motor type (Not used.) 0000: Induction motor 1000: Permanent magnet Motor selection synchronous motor (PMSM) 00: Motor 1 01: Motor 2 (Not used.) Inverter drive control...
  • Page 113 3.4 Programming mode ◼ Hexadecimal expression A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal. Table 3.4-6 shows the correspondence between the two notations. Table 3.4-6 Binary and hexadecimal conversion Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal 3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status: “I/O Checking: 4.i_o” Using Menu number 4 “I/O Checking”...
  • Page 114 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-7 I/O check items Monitor Item Unit Description Control circuit terminal Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals. For details, 4_00 － (input/output) refer to “◼ I/O display for control circuit terminals terminals.” Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals that received a command via RS-485 or field bus option.

  • Page 115: Led4 Led3

    3.4 Programming mode Monitor Item Unit Description Shows the input state of the dedicated command via the field bus option. 4_43 Bus option command － bit0: Q_STOP (force to stop) command bit1: BX (coast to stop) command ◼ I/O display for control circuit terminals terminals The status of control circuit terminal I/O signals can be displayed in two ways: with “•...

  • Page 116: Bit

    3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-9 Display of I/O signal status in hexadecimal (example) LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Input terminal (RST) * (XR) * (XF) * EN2 ― ― ― ― REV FWD Output 30A/ ― ― ― ― ―...

  • Page 117: Led No

    3.4 Programming mode ◼ Displaying the optional relay output interface card output The LED monitor can also show the status of the output terminal on the relay output interface card, in addition to the status of the control circuit terminals. Table 3.4-11 lists the assignment of digital I/O signals to the LED segments.
  • Page 118 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.5 Reading maintenance information: “Maintenance Information: 5.CHE” Menu number 5 “Maintenance Information: 5.CHE” contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter. The menu transition in “Maintenance Information” is same as that in Menu number 3 “Drive Monitoring.”...
  • Page 119 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-12 Display items in “Maintenance Information” (continued) Monitor Item Description Shows the content of the motor 1 startup counter (i.e., the number of run commands issued). Counter range: 0 to 65,530 times Number of startups Display: 0 to 9999 5_08 for motor 1 If the count exceeds 10,000, the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor...
  • Page 120 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-12 Display items in “Maintenance Information” (continued) Monitor Item Description Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of motor 1. Counter range: 0 to 99,990 hours Cumulative run time Display: 0 to 9999 (x10 LED turns ON) 5_23 of motor 1 Actual cumulative motor run time (hours) = Displayed value x 10...
  • Page 121 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-12 Display items in “Maintenance Information” (continued) Monitor Item Description Regenerative load Shows the maximum value of 5_51 when the inverter is on. 5_50 factor maximum The value returns to 0 when the inverter power is turned off. value Shows the regeneration load factor during 100 s.
  • Page 122 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.6 Reading alarm information: “Alarm Information: 6.al” Menu number 6 “Alarm Information” (6.al) shows the causes of the past 10 alarms with an alarm code. Further, it is also possible to display alarm information for the past 4 alarms, indicating the status of the inverter when each alarm occurred.
  • Page 123 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-14 Display items in “Alarm Information” Monitor Description Description 6_00 Output frequency Output frequency before slip compensation Output current 6_01 Output current Display unit: A (ampere) Output voltage 6_02 Output voltage Display unit: V (volt) 6_03 Calculated torque Calculated torque Reference...
  • Page 124 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-14 Display items in “Alarm Information” (continued) Monitor Description Description No. of consecutive 6_15 Shows how many times the same alarm has occurred consecutively. occurrences Simultaneously occurring alarm code (1) (“ ---” is displayed if no alarm 6_16 Multiple alarm 1 has occurred.)
  • Page 125 3.4 Programming mode Table 3.4-15 Running status 3 (6_24) bit assignment. Symbol Content Symbol Content Fixed at 0 “1” when the fan is in operation. “1” when current 2 is detected. “1” during keypad operation. “1” when a motor overload early “1”...
  • Page 126 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.7 Copying data: “Data Copying: 7.Cpy” • Data copying can only be performed when the remote operation keypad TP-E2 or the multi-function keypad TP-A2SW are connected. (When neither of these are connected, this menu is not displayed.) This section describes operation using the TP-E2.
  • Page 127 3.4 Programming mode Basic key operation (when using TP-E2） Turn the inverter ON. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to Operation (1) switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. Use the keys to display “Data Copying” (7.Cpy ). Operation (2) Use the key to skip menus by menu number.
  • Page 128 3.4 Programming mode If err is blinking, press the key to clear the error. If diff is blinking, operation can be continued by pressing the key but the data of the extended function code is not changed. ■ Data protection You can protect data saved in the keypad from unexpected modifications.
  • Page 129 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.8 Checking the status of communication with the host device: “Communication monitor: 9.S__ to 9.dat” You can check the communication commands with the host equipment and the monitor codes with Menu number 9 “Communication monitor: 9.S__ to 9.dat”. Displayed Item Display/Setting content...
  • Page 130 3.4 Programming mode 3.4.9 Setting favorites function codes data: “Favorites: 0.fnC” With menu number 0 “Favorites” in the Programming mode, you can display only the function codes set as favorites from all the function codes and change the function code data. There is no limit to the number of registered function codes.

  • Page 131: Releasing The Alarm And Switching To Running Mode

    3.5 Alarm mode Alarm mode If an abnormal condition arises, the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm, then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode. At the same time, an alarm code appears on the LED monitor. 3.5.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode.
  • Page 132 3.6 About the display content of Ethernet built-in type (E3N) About the display content of Ethernet built-in type (E3N) For information on the E3N front LED monitor, refer to Chapter 9 “9.3.8 About the display content of Ethernet built- in type (E3N).” 3-44...
  • Page 133 Chapter 4 TEST RUN PROCEDURE This chapter describes basic settings required for making a test run. Contents Test Run Procedure Flowchart ·················································································· 4-1 Checking Prior to Powering On ················································································· 4-2 Powering ON and Checking ····················································································· 4-3 Destination setting ································································································· 4-4 Switching the Applicable Motor Rating (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) ····························...
  • Page 134 [ 1 ] Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 ················································· 4-35 [ 2 ] Motor protection using a thermistor ···································································· 4-35 Function code settings when replacing previous models ················································ 4-36 4.9.1 Replacing the FRENIC-Multi(E1) or FRENIC-Ace(E2) ············································ 4-36 [ 1 ] Function code copying procedure using the keypad ···············································...

  • Page 135: Test Run Procedure Flowchart

    4.1 Test Run Procedure Flowchart Test Run Procedure Flowchart Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below. This chapter describes the test run procedure with motor 1 dedicated function codes. For motor 2, replace those function codes with motor 2 dedicated ones. These function codes are marked with “*.”...

  • Page 136: Checking Prior To Powering On

    4.2 Checking Prior to Powering On Checking Prior to Powering On Check the following before powering on the inverter. Check that the main power supply input terminals ([L1/R], [L2/S], and [L3/T] or [L1/L] and [L2/N]), the inverter output terminals ([U], [V], and [W]) and the inverter grounding terminal ([ G]) are correctly connected.

  • Page 137: Powering On And Checking

    4.3 Powering ON and Checking Powering ON and Checking • Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON. • Do not operate the unit with wet hands. Failure to observe this could result in electric shock.

  • Page 138: Destination Setting

    4.4 Destination setting Destination setting For inverter type FRN****E3□-2G/4G/7G (FRENIC-Ace Global Model), the destination must be set first after the initial power supply. Without setting the destination, the function code cannot be changed. The inverter cannot be operated either. By setting the destination, basic function codes such as rated voltage, rated frequency, etc. are initialized to general values in each region (Table 4.4-1).
  • Page 139 4.4 Destination setting Destination Asia China Europe Americas Korea Japan Standard value for Fuji IE3 motor 0.00% Standard value for F09/A05 Torque boost 1, 2 Fuji IE3 motor Electronic thermal Standard F11/A07 1, 2 (Overload value for detection level) HP rating motor Overload early E34/E37/E55...
  • Page 140 4.4 Destination setting RESET RESET ∧ FUNC ∨ DATA For Japan RESET FUNC DATA ∧ ∨ STOP STOP ∧ ∨ For Asia FUNC DATA RESET ∧ ∨ STOP STOP For China ∧ ∨ FUNC RESET DATA ∧ ∨ STOP STOP For EU FUNC DATA...

  • Page 141: Switching The Applicable Motor Rating (Nd, Hd, Hnd And Hhd Modes)

    4.5 Switching the Applicable Motor Rating (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) Switching the Applicable Motor Rating (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) The ND mode is set by default with the three-phase 200 V, three-phase 400 V, and single-phase 200 V series. Changing the data of function code F80 switches the applicable motor rank to match load conditions.
  • Page 142 4.5 Switching the Applicable Motor Rating (ND, HD, HND and HHD Modes) Each specification is subject to restrictions on the following function codes and internal processing. Table 4.5-2 HND mode Function HND mode HD mode Name HHD mode ND mode Remarks Code (F80=1)

  • Page 143: Selecting A Desired Motor Drive Control

    4.6 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control The FRENIC-Ace supports the following motor drive controls.  Refer to “4.7 Performance Comparison for Drive Controls (Summary)” for the characteristics of each drive control method. Table 4.6-1 F42 * Speed feedback Inverter drive control...

  • Page 144: V/F Control With Sensor For Induction Motor

    4.6 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control 4.6.4 V/f Control with sensor for Induction motor Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics, decreasing the motor rotation. Under V/f control with sensor, the inverter detects the motor rotation using the encoder mounted on the motor shaft and compensates for the decrease in slip frequency by the PI control to match the motor rotation with the commanded speed.

  • Page 145: Sensorless Vector Control (Pmsms (Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor))

    The final performance should be determined by adjusting the speed control system or other elements with the inverter being connected to the machine (load). If you have any questions, contact your Fuji Electric representative. 4-11...
  • Page 146 4.7 Performance Comparison for Drive Controls (Summary) 4-12...

  • Page 147: Configuring Function Codes For Drive Controls

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls The relation of the motor control method, motor selection and motor parameter setting is shown in Figure 4.8-1. It is necessary to change the motor parameter setting depending on the driven motor. Control system PG sensor related settings Motor requirements...

  • Page 148: Driving An Induction Motor (Induction Motor)

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Factory defaults are set to drive the induction motor with V/f control. (F42 = 0) The motor cannot be driven properly if the PMSM is connected. If the PMSM is driven, it is necessary to set F42=15 or 16 to change the drive control mode for driving the PMSM.

  • Page 149: 2 ] If Running The Motor With V/F Control With Sensor

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 2 ] If running the motor with V/f control with sensor Configuring the function codes concerning a PG (pulse generator) Configuring the function codes concerning a PG (pulse generator) and PG signals If “V/f control with sensor (F42*=3)”, “Dynamic torque vector control with sensor(F42*=4)”...

  • Page 150: Basic Settings

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Basic Settings If using “V/f control with sensor (F42* = 3)”, it is necessary to set the basic function codes below. Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and design values of the machine. For the motor ratings, check the ratings printed on the motor's nameplate.
  • Page 151 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 3 ] If running the motor with V/f control with slip compensation, dynamic torque vector control, or sensorless vector control Basic Settings If using “V/f control with slip compensation (F42* = 2)”, “Dynamic torque vector control (F42* = 1”, or “Sensorless vector control (F42* = 5)”, it is necessary to set the basic function codes below.
  • Page 152 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Perform tuning in accordance with the “[ 5 ] Induction motor tuning method.” Fuji non-standard motors, motors of other companies (1) Setting motor basic constants Table 4.8-5 Function Name Function code data Factory default code p 99 * Motor 1 selection...
  • Page 153 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 4 ] If running the motor with dynamic torque vector control with sensor or vector control with sensor Configuring the function codes concerning a PG (pulse generator) If the motor is driven under “Dynamic torque vector control with sensor (F42* = 4)“ or “Vector control with sensor (F42* = 6),”...
  • Page 154 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Fuji non-standard motors, motors of other companies (1) Setting motor basic constants Table 4.8-7 Function Name Function code data Factory default code p 99 * Motor 1 selection 4: Other motors f 04 * Please refer to Table 4.4-1 Base frequency 1 Motor rated value (printed on motor...

  • Page 155: 5 ] Induction Motor Tuning Method

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 5 ] Induction motor tuning method If performing tuning, do so using the following procedure after specifying settings based on the control method indicated previously (4.8.1 [1] to [4]). ■ Selection of tuning type Check the situation of the machine and select “Tuning with the motor stopped (P04* = 1)”...
  • Page 156 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls ■ Tuning procedure The following procedure is for types other than the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). Perform tuning via FRENIC-Loader or Ethernet communication if using an E3N inverter. 1) Set function code P04 to “1”, “2” or “5” and press the key.
  • Page 157 With the Ethernet built-in type, it is possible to read the function code (X03) and check the content of the error subcodes. If any of these errors occurs, remove the error cause and perform tuning again, or consult your Fuji Electric representative.

  • Page 158: Pmsm Operation

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls 4.8.2 PMSM operation [ 1 ] If running the motor with sensorless vector control (PMSMs) Basic Settings If using “Sensorless vector control (F42 = 15)”, it is necessary to set the basic function codes below. Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and design values of the machine.
  • Page 159 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Fuji non-standard motors, motors of other companies (1) Selection of motor type and pole position detection method PMSMs are categorized into the following types based on the structure of the rotor. a) SPM (Surface Permanent Magnet) b) IPM (Interior permanent magnet) The starting magnetic pole position detection method depends on the motor type.
  • Page 160 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Function Name Function code data Factory default code Value described in motor test Fuji standard PMSM (GNB2 report series) constant p 63 PMSM 1 (induced voltage) If the value is unknown, execute tuning with the motor running. Set the iron loss described in Fuji standard PMSM (GNB2 motor test report divided by Motor...

  • Page 161: 2 ] If Driving The Motor Under Vector Control With Sensor (Pmsms)

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 2 ] If driving the motor under vector control with sensor (PMSMs) Configuring the function codes concerning a PG (pulse generator) If using “Vector control with sensor (F42 = 16)”, it is necessary to set the following function codes in order to receive receipt speed feedback value from the encoder.
  • Page 162 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Basic Settings If using “Vector control with sensor (F42 = 16)”, it is necessary to set the basic function codes below. Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and design values of the machine. For the motor ratings, check the ratings printed on the motor’s nameplate.
  • Page 163 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls (2) Setting motor basic constants To drive another manufacturer’s PMSM, set the motor parameters shown in Table 4.8-13 and execute offline tuning. Check the motor parameters on the motor rating nameplate or consult with the motor manufacturer before setting them.
  • Page 164 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls Table 4.8-13 cont. Function Name Function code data Factory default code Characteristics of the speed 0.200 (s) *1 controller *1: The values to the right are set automatically when 15, 16 are set for the function code F42.

  • Page 165: 3 ] Pmsm Tuning Method

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls [ 3 ] PMSM tuning method If performing tuning, do so using the following procedure after specifying settings based on the control method indicated previously (4.8.1 [1] to [2]). ◼Selection of the tuning type Check the mechanical state and then choose between tuning with the motor running (P04=2) and tuning with the motor stopped (P04=1).
  • Page 166 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls ◼ Preparation of machine To prepare for the tuning with the motor running, remove the mechanical couplings and disable the safety devices. ◼ Tuning procedure The following procedure is for types other than the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). Perform tuning via FRENIC-Loader or Ethernet communication if using an E3N inverter.
  • Page 167 4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls ◼ Tuning errors (PMSMs) Since inappropriate tuning may cause failure of hunting or other operations and decrease the operation accuracy, the error er7 occurs in the inverter and the tuning values are erased when there is an error in the tuning results. Check the following if the tuning error (er7 ) occurs.
  • Page 168 You can check the error subcode by reading the function code X03.  If an error other than er7 occurs, refer to Chapter 6 “TROUBLESHOOTING” and remove the cause. If any of these errors occurs, remove the error cause and perform tuning again, or consult your Fuji Electric representative. 4-34...

  • Page 169: Motor Temperature Protection Settings

    4.8 Configuring Function Codes for Drive Controls 4.8.3 Motor temperature protection settings [ 1 ] Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 To protect the motor from overheating caused by motor overload, the output current is monitored inside the inverter and the device features an electronic thermal overload protection function that performs a protective operation (OL1 ) when the current exceeds the set value for a long time.

  • Page 170: Function Code Settings When Replacing Previous Models

    4.9 Function code settings when replacing previous models Function code settings when replacing previous models Configure the function codes with the procedure below if you replace a Fuji general-purpose inverter (FRENIC- Multi(E1), FRENIC-Ace(E2)) with the FRENIC-Ace(E3). 4.9.1 Replacing the FRENIC-Multi(E1) or FRENIC-Ace(E2) With the FRENIC-Ace(E3), you can read the function codes of the previous model FRENIC-Multi(E1) or FRENIC- Ace(E2) and copy them to the FRENIC-Ace(E3) using the copying function of the optional keypad (TP-E2) to set the settings easily.

  • Page 171: 2 ] Procedure To Enter The Function Codes Directly From The Keypad

    PC Loader software.  The PC Loader can be downloaded for free from the Fuji Electric website. Refer to the Loader software Instruction Manual for directions on how to use the software. 4-37...

  • Page 172: Operation Check

    4.10 Operation check 4.10 Operation check Set the function codes after sufficiently understanding the content of this User's Manual. If operation is performed after recklessly changing function code data, the motor may rotate at a torque and speed at which the machine is unable to tolerate.

  • Page 173: Adjusting The Function Codes For Motor Control

    4.10 Operation check 4.10.3 Adjusting the function codes for motor control Problems such as insufficient torque and overcurrent can be solved by adjusting the function codes. The main function codes are described below.  For details, refer to Chapter 5 “FUNCTION CODES” or Chapter 6 “TROUBLESHOOTING.” Table 4.10-1 Inverter drive control Function...
  • Page 174 4.10 Operation check Table 4.10-2 Function Name How to adjust Code Increase the filter constant if excessive overshoot/undershoot Speed control 1 d 01 * occurs when the speed command is changed, and decrease the (Speed command filter) filter constant if the response to speed command changes is poor. Increase the filter constant if you cannot increase the speed control Speed control 1 d 02 *...

  • Page 175: Frequency Command Selection

    4.11 Frequency command selection 4.11 Frequency command selection Factory defaults are usually set so that frequency commands are input via keypad operation (or, in the case of E3N, via Ethernet communication), but you can change the settings to allow you to select input via external potentiometer, etc.

  • Page 176: Setting The Frequency Via Multistep Frequency Selection (Speed 1, Speed 2, Etc.)

    4.11 Frequency command selection  For precautions related to wiring, refer to Chapter 2 “INSTALLATION AND WIRING.”  For details on how to modify the function code data, refer to Chapter 3 “3.4.1 Setting function codes: “Data Setting: 1.f__ through 1.k__”.” 4.11.3 Setting the frequency via multistep frequency selection (speed 1, speed 2, etc.) Follow the procedure below.

  • Page 177: Run Command Selection

    4.12 Run command selection 4.12 Run command selection Factory defaults are set so that run commands are input via keypad ( key, key) operation (or, in the case of E3N, via Ethernet communication), but you can change the settings to allow you to select input via external signal. The following describes examples of each selectable input format and their input methods.
  • Page 179 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter explains the table of function codes and the detail of each function code. Contents Function Codes Overview ························································································ 5-1 Function Code Tables ····························································································· 5-2 5.2.1 How to read the function code tables ·································································· 5-2 5.2.2 Function code tables ·······················································································...
  • Page 180 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ·········································································· 5-177 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) ········································································ 5-188 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ···························································· 5-198 [ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial value at time of shipment ······················································································ 5-215 [ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions at power shutdown ········································································...

  • Page 181: Function Codes Overview

    5.1 Function Codes Overview Function Codes Overview Function codes are used for selecting various functions of FRENIC-Ace. Function codes comprise 3 digits or 4 digits of alphanumeric characters. The first digit categorizes the function code group alphabetically and the subsequent 2 or 3 digits identify each code within the group by number.

  • Page 182: Function Code Tables

    5.2 Function Code Tables Function Code Tables 5.2.1 How to read the function code tables ■ Differences by type The availability, selection range, etc., of certain function codes on the FRENIC-Ace Ethernet built-in type (E3N) differ from other types (E3S/E3E). Check the symbols in the “Type”...

  • Page 183: Function Code Tables

    5.2 Function Code Tables ■ Change, apply, and save function code data during operation Function codes are categorized into those for which data change is enabled during operation of the inverter and those for which such change is disabled. The meaning of the symbols in the “Change during operation” columns of the function code tables is described in the following table.

  • Page 184: Control Methods

    5.2 Function Code Tables ■ Control methods The FRENIC-Ace runs under any of the following control methods. Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific control method. The enable or disable status is indicated with an icon for each control method within the Data setting range field in the function code list tables.

  • Page 185: F Codes: Basic Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables 5.2.2 Function code tables The tables of function codes to be used in FRENIC-Ace are shown below. [ 1 ] F codes: Basic Functions Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Function Name...
  • Page 186 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Function Name Control method and Data setting range Default value code Torque boost 1 U: 0.00% 5-86 A, C, E, K, J: 0.0 to 20.0% (% value against Base frequency voltage 1) Refer to note “*1”...
  • Page 187 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Function Name Control method and Data setting range Default value code Terminal [FM1] *5 5-107 (Mode selection) 0: Voltage output (0 to +10 VDC) Current output (4 to 20 mA DC) Current output (0 to 20 mA DC) Pulse output (Output gain) 0 to 300% (Function selection) [E3S/E3E]...
  • Page 188 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Function Name Control method and Data setting range Default value code Control method selection 1 5-120 [E3S/E3E] V/f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V/f control with slip compensation active V/f control with sensor Dynamic torque vector control with sensor Sensorless vector control Vector control with sensor...

  • Page 189: 2 ] E Codes: Terminal Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 2 ] E codes: Terminal Functions Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value E01 Terminal [X1](Function selection) Refer to E01 to E09 in Table 5.2-3 Control input terminal setting list table.
  • Page 190 5.2 Function Code Tables Function code and name Type E01 to E05 E98, E99 o101 to o113 Control method and Data setting range For remote Terminal [I1] Terminal [X1] Terminal keypad TP-E2 to [113] to [X5] [FWD], [REV] M/Shift key (for OPC-DIO) 32(1032): Pre-excitation "EXITE"...
  • Page 191 5.2 Function Code Tables Function code and name Type E01 to E05 E98, E99 o101 to o113 Control method and Data setting range For remote Terminal [I1] Terminal [X1] Terminal keypad TP-E2 to [113] to [X5] [FWD], [REV] M/Shift key (for OPC-DIO) 100: No assignment "NONE"...
  • Page 192 5.2 Function Code Tables Table 5.2-4 Control output terminal setting list table (Y indicates those selections that can be selected, and N indicates those that cannot be selected.) Function code and name Type E20 to E21, o01 to o03 o121 to o128 Terminal Control method and Data setting range For remote...
  • Page 193 5.2 Function Code Tables Function code and name Type E20 to E21, o01 to o03 o121 to o128 Terminal Control method and Data setting range For remote Terminal [Y6A/C] Terminal keypad [O1] [Y1] to [Y2], TP-E2 [Y8A/C] [30A/B/C] M-LED [O8] (for OPC-CP- indicator (for OPC-DIO)
  • Page 194 5.2 Function Code Tables Function code and name Type E20 to E21, o01 to o03 o121 to o128 Terminal Control method and Data setting range For remote Terminal [Y6A/C] Terminal keypad [O1] [Y1] to [Y2], TP-E2 [Y8A/C] [30A/B/C] M-LED [O8] (for OPC-CP- indicator (for OPC-DIO)
  • Page 195 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value E43 LED monitor (Item selection) 5-166 Speed monitor (Selectable with E48) Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Input power 10: PID command value 12: PID feedback value 13: Timer value 14: PID output 15: Load rate...
  • Page 196 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value E61 Terminal [12] 5-171 (Extension function selection) None E62 Terminal [C1] (C1 function) Auxiliary frequency setting 1 (Extension function selection) Auxiliary frequency setting 2 PID command E63 Terminal [C1] (V2 function) PID feedback value (Extension function selection)

  • Page 197: 3 ] C Codes: Control Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 3 ] C codes: Control Functions Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value C01 Jump frequency 5-177 0.0 to 599.0 Hz (Skip range) 0.0 to 30.0 Hz C05 Multistep frequency 1 0.00 5-178 0.00 to 599.00 Hz 0.00...
  • Page 198 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value C51 Bias (PID command) 0.00 (Bias value) -100.0 to 0.00 to 100.00% (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00 C53 (Forward/reverse operation 5-186 selection) (Frequency setting 1) 0: Forward operation 1: Reverse operation (Frequency setting 2) C55 Analog input adjustment...

  • Page 199: P Codes: Motor 1 Parameters

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 4 ] P codes: Motor 1 Parameters Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value P01 Motor 1 (Poles)
  • Page 200 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value (For adjustment by 0.0 to 100.0; 999 5-195 Y1Y2 manufacturer) *7 (Flux limitation value) 50.0 to 150.0; 999 Y1Y2 (For adjustment by 0.0 to 100.0 manufacturer) *9 (NS discrimination current 0 to 200% (100% = motor rated current) Y1Y2...

  • Page 201: 5 ] H Codes: High-Performance Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 5 ] H codes: High-performance Functions Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H02 Data initialization 5-198 (Initial value selection) 0:...
  • Page 202 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H42 Capacitance of DC link bus 5-213 capacitor For adjustment when carrying out replacement, 0 to 65535 H43 Cumulative run time of the cooling fan For adjustment when carrying out replacement, 0 to 9999 (updated in 10-hour units) Displays the cumulative run time for the cooling fan H44 Startup count 1...
  • Page 203 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H68 Slip compensation 1 5-218 (Operating condition selection) 0: Enable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base frequency or higher Disable during acceleration/deceleration, enable at base frequency or higher Enable during acceleration/deceleration, disable at base frequency or higher...
  • Page 204 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H95 DC braking 5-99 (Select motor characteristics) 0: 5-228 Slow response Quick response H96 STOP key priority/Start check A, C, E, 5-229 function K, J: 0 [E3S/E3E] U: E3S/E: 3 STOP key priority disable/ Start check function disable...

  • Page 205: 6 ] H1 Codes: High-Performance Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 6 ] H1 codes: High-performance Functions Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H101 Destination Before 5-235...
  • Page 206 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value H193 User-set initial value (Save) 5-200 5-240 Disable Save enable H194 (Protection) 0: Save enable Protected (save disable) H195 DC braking 0.00 5-99 (Braking time at startup) 0.00 (disable): 0.01 to 30.00 s 5-240 is valid only when P30 = 0 H196 (For adjustment by...

  • Page 207: 7 ] A Codes: Motor 2 Parameters

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 7 ] A codes: Motor 2 Parameters Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value A01 Maximum output frequency 2 200V class...
  • Page 208 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value A15 Motor 2 (Poles) 2 to 128 poles (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 1000 kW (except when P39 = 1) 0.01 to 1000 HP (when P39 = 1) (Rated current) 0.00 to 2000 A (Auto tuning) Disable...
  • Page 209 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value (Notch filter resonance 5-285 frequency) 1 to 500 Hz (Notch filter attenuation level) 0 to 40 dB A51 Cumulative run time of motor 2 5-241 0 to 9999 (updated in units of ten hours) 5-242 Change in cumulative motor run time (Reset is enabled) A52 Startup count 2...

  • Page 210: 8 ] B Codes: Speed Control 3 Parameters

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 8 ] b codes: Speed Control 3 Parameters Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value b43 Speed control 3 Same as A43 5-282 0.020 (Speed command filter) (Speed detection filter) Same as A44 0.005 (P gain) Same as A45...

  • Page 211: 9 ] R Codes: Speed Control 4 Parameters

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 9 ] r codes: Speed Control 4 Parameters Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value Speed control 4 Same as A43 5-282 0.020 (Speed command filter) (Speed detection filter) Same as A44 0.005 (P gain) Same as A45...

  • Page 212: 10 ] J Codes: Application Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 10 ] J codes: Application Functions Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value PID control (Operation selection) 5-244 Disable Process (forward operation) Process (reverse operation) Speed control (dancer) (Remote command) [E3S/E3E] E3S/E: 0 5-246 Keypad operation ( keys)
  • Page 213 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value (Operation mode) 5-261 Constant speed & decelerating Constant speed All modes (Timer time) 0.00 to 600.00 s 0.00 Brake control signal 100.00 5-263 (Brake-release current) 0.00 to 300.00% (Brake-release frequency/speed) 0.0 to 25.0 Hz (Brake-release timer)
  • Page 214 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value Brake control signal 100.00 5-263 (Brake-release torque) 0.00 to 300.00% (Operation selection) 0 to 127 Bit 0: Speed detection/speed command selection (0: speed detection value, 1: speed command value) Bit 1: Reserved Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: Not used...

  • Page 215: J1 Codes: Application Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 11 ] J1 codes: Application Functions Among J1 code control methods, control methods are enabled. Type Default value Name Control method and Data setting range J105 PID control (Display unit) 0: Based on the unit and scale of the PID control feedback value 5-280 No unit r/min...

  • Page 216: D Codes: Application Functions 2

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 12 ] d codes: Application Functions 2 Type Name Control method and Data setting range Default value d01 Speed control 1 0.020 5-282 (Speed command filter) 0.000 to 5.000 s 0.200 s is set automatically when the setting is F42 = 15, 16. (Speed detection filter) Y Y* Y 0.005...
  • Page 217 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Name Control method and Data setting range Default value d51 (For adjustment by manufacturer) *25 -500 to 500 5-293 d52 (For adjustment by manufacturer) *25 -500 to 500 d55 (For adjustment by manufacturer) *25 0000～00FF (Hexadecimal display) 0000 d56 (For adjustment by manufacturer) *25 0.00 to 50.00% N N Y...
  • Page 218 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Name Control method and Data setting range Default value d99 Extension function 1 0000 5-323 0000 to FFFF (in hexadecimal) Bit 0: (For adjustment by manufacturer) *27 Bit 1: (For adjustment by manufacturer) *27 Bit 2: (For adjustment by manufacturer) *27 Bit 3: JOG operation from communication (0: Disable, 1: Enable)

  • Page 219: D1 Codes: Application Functions 2

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 13 ] d1 codes: Application Functions 2 Type Name Control method and Data setting range Default value d120 Brake control signal (Brake- 5-263 release current) (REV) Use 0.00 to 300.00%, 999: use J68 5-324 d121 Brake signal (Brake-release frequency/speed) Use 0.0 to 25.0 Hz, 999: use J69 (REV)

  • Page 220: D2 Codes: Application Functions 2

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 14 ] d2 codes: Application Functions 2 Among d2 control methods, are enabled. Type Default value Name Control method and Data setting range Position regulator gain 0.1 to 300.0 5-325 d204 (high speed range) Electronic gear ratio 1 to 65535 d206 (Denominator)

  • Page 221: U Codes: Customizable Logic

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 15 ] U codes: Customizable Logic Among U code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value U00 Customizable logic 0: Disable 5-336 (Operation selection) 1: Enable (Customizable logic operation)
  • Page 222 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value U02 Customizable logic Some signals are disabled depending on the control method. 5-336 Step 1 (Input 1) For details, refer to E20 or E61. [E3S/E3E] (Input 2) [Digital] 0(1000): Inverter running...
  • Page 223 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value 4029(5029): I9 terminal input “I9” 5-336 4030(5030): I10 terminal input “I10” 4031(5031): I11 terminal input “I11” 4032(5032): I12 terminal input “I12” 4033(5033): I13 terminal input “I13” 4041(5041): CLI1 terminal input "CLI1"...
  • Page 224 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value 38(1038): Current detection 2 “ID2” 5-336 39(1039): Current detection 3 “ID3” 41(1041): Low current detection "IDL" 42(1042): PID alarm output “PID-ALM” 43(1043): Under PID control “PID-CTL” 44(1044): Under PID low liquid level stop “PID-STP”...
  • Page 225 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value 9001: Analog [12] terminal input signal “12” 5-336 9002: Analog [C1] terminal input signal (C1 function) “C1” 9003: Analog [C1] terminal input signal (V2 function) “V2” 9010: UP/DOWN values “UP/DOWN”...

  • Page 226: 16 ] U1 Codes: Customizable Logic

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 16 ] U1 codes: Customizable Logic Among U1 code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value U100 Task process cycle setting 0: Auto 5-336 (Selected automatically from 2, 5, 10, and 20 ms depending on the step number)

  • Page 227: 17 ] Y Codes: Link Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 17 ] y codes: LINK Functions Among y code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value y01 RS-485 communication 1 0(1) to 255 5-372 (Station address) 0: Use BACnet MS/TP...
  • Page 228 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value y98 Bus function (Operation Frequency setting/torque command Run command E3S/E: 0 5-381 selection) [E3S/E3E] Based on H30 Based on H30 Command from bus Based on H30 Based on H30 Command from bus Command from bus...

  • Page 229: O Code: Option Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 18 ] o code: Option Functions Among o code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Name Control method and Data setting range value o01 OPC-CP-RY option Refer to o01 to o07 in “Table 5.2-4 Control output terminal setting list table” －...
  • Page 230 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Name Control method and Data setting range value (Bias) -200.0 to 200.00% 0.00 － (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00 (Display unit) Same as C58 (Maximum scale) -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990.0 100.00 (Minimum scale) -999.0 to 0.00 to 9990.0 0.00 o75 OPC-AIO option 0: 4 to 20 mA Unipolar...

  • Page 231: 19 ] O1 Codes: Option Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 19 ] o1 codes: Option Functions Among o1 code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value o101 OPC-DIO option Refer to o101 to o113 in “Table 5.2-3 Control input terminal setting list table.” －...

  • Page 232: 20 ] O2 Codes: Option Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 20 ] o2 codes: Option Functions Among o2 code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value o201 IP address setting 1 0 to 255 E3S/E: 0 E3N: 192...

  • Page 233: K Codes: Keypad Functions

    5.2 Function Code Tables [ 21 ] K codes: Keypad Functions Among K code control methods, with some exceptions, all control methods ( are enabled. Factory default…A (for Asia), C (for China), E (for Europe), U (for Americas), K (for Korea), J (for Japan) Type Default Name...
  • Page 234 5.2 Function Code Tables Type Default Name Control method and Data setting range value K25 Display Unit for Load speed 1: No unit 5-385 4: r/min 10: mm/s 11: mm/m 12: mm/h 13: m/s 14: m/min 15: m/h 16: FPS 17: FPM 18: FPH 19: SPM...
  • Page 235 5.2 Function Code Tables Table 5.2-1 Factory default setting values by capacity Fuji premium efficiency motors (When 5 is set to motor 1 to 2 selection P99/A39.) Torque boost 1 to 2 *1 Momentary Motor capacity F09/A05 power failure restart [kW] [HP] HD/HHD...
  • Page 236 5.2 Function Code Tables Table 5.2-2 Motor constant When Fuji standard motor 8-series, other are selected (Function code P99/A39 = 0, 3, 4) ■ Three-phase 200 V series 5-56...
  • Page 237 5.2 Function Code Tables ■ Three-phase 400 V series 5-57...
  • Page 238 5.2 Function Code Tables When HP display motor is selected by motor selection (Function code P99/A39 = 1) ■ 200V series 5-58...
  • Page 239 5.2 Function Code Tables ■ 400 V series 5-59...
  • Page 240 5.2 Function Code Tables When Fuji premium efficiency motor is selected in motor selection (Function code P99/A39 = 5) ■ Three-phase 200 V series 5-60...
  • Page 241 5.2 Function Code Tables ■ Three-phase 400 V series 5-61...

  • Page 242: Description Of Function Codes

    5.3 Description of Function Codes Ch apter 5 Description of Function Codes This section describes details of function code. In principle, explanation is given for each function code in order of group and numerical order. However, function codes that are strongly related to one function are explained together in the first paragraph.

  • Page 243: F Codes (Fundamental Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Data protection This is a function to protect currently set data by disabling the ability to make changes in function code data (except F00) and all types of command values (frequency setting, PID command) by key operation from keypad.
  • Page 244 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Frequency setting 1 Related function code: F18 Bias (Frequency setting 1) C30 Frequency setting 2 C31 to C35 Analog input adjustment (Terminal [12]) C36 to C40 Analog input adjustment (Terminal [C1]) C41 to C45 Analog input adjustment (Terminal [V2]) C55 to C56 Analog input adjustment (Terminal [12]) (Bias base point)

  • Page 245: 1 ] Using The Keypad (F01 = 0 Or 8)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Setting method of reference frequency [ 1 ] Using the keypad (F01 = 0 or 8) Set the data of function code F01 to “0” or “8.” When the keypad is set to Programming or Alarm mode, the keys are disabled to modify the reference frequency.

  • Page 246: 2 ] Setting The Frequency With Analog Input (F01 = 1 To 3, 5, 6)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) [ 2 ] Setting the frequency with analog input (F01 = 1 to 3, 5, 6) It is possible to arbitrarily specify a frequency setting value for Frequency setting 1 from the analog inputs (voltage value to be input to terminal [12] and [C1] (V2 function), or current value to be input to terminal [C1] (C1 function)) by multiplying them with the gain and adding the bias.
  • Page 247 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Terminal [C1] (C1 function) range / polarity selection (C40) C40 data Terminal input range Handling when bias value is set to minus 0: Unipolar 4 to 20 mA Limit below 0 point with 0 1: Unipolar 0 to 20 mA 10: Bipolar...

  • Page 248: Frequency Command

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Gain, bias Terminal <Frequency setting 1: F01> <Frequency setting 2: C30> Reference frequency Reference frequency Gain Gain Point B Point B [12] Bias Bias Point A Point A Analog input Analog input Bias base Bias base...
  • Page 249 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) If unipolar (terminal [12] (C35 = 1), terminal [C1] (V2 function) (C45 = 1), terminal [C1] (C1 function) (C40 = 0, 1)) For reference frequency and analog input of Frequency setting 1, it is possible to set arbitrary relationship by A point (determined by bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50)) and point B (determined by the gain corresponding to each analog input and the gain reference point (C32 and C34, C37 and C39, C42 and C44)).
  • Page 250 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) For bipolar (Terminal [12] (C35 = 0) For terminal [12], by setting function codes C35 to “0,” it is possible to use bipolar input (-10 to +10 V). When both bias (F18) and bias reference point (C50) are set to “0,” command becomes forward and reverse symmetric as shown in the diagram below.
  • Page 251 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) When operating unipolar analog input as bipolar (Terminal [12] (C35 = 0), Terminal [C1] (V2 function) (C45 = 0), Terminal [C1] (C1 function) (C40 = 10, 11)) By setting the bias value to a minus value, it is possible to obtain a negative reference frequency. Example of frequency setting with terminal [C1] (V2 function) when -100% is set to the bias value is shown in the diagram below.

  • Page 252: 3 ] Frequency Setting By Digital Input Signal "Up"/"Down" (F01=7)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) [ 3 ] Frequency setting by digital input signal “UP”/“DOWN” (F01=7) As frequency setting, UP/DOWN control is selected, and when the terminal command UP or DOWN is turned on with Run command ON, the output frequency increases or decreases accordingly, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.
  • Page 253 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ＜Initial value of UP/DOWN control when switching the setting method of frequency setting＞ The initial value when setting method of frequency setting is set to UP/DOWN control is shown in the following table.

  • Page 254: 4 ] Frequency Setting Using Digital I/O (Option Di Interface Card) (F01 = 11)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) [ 4 ] Frequency setting using digital I/O (option DI interface card) (F01 = 11) The frequency setting with binary (8, 12 bits) or BCD code via option DI/O interface card (OPC-DI) is also available to be selected.
  • Page 255 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) +Polarity –Polarity Pulse train sign Pulse train input Data 0: Pulse train sign/pulse train input +Polarity –Polarity Reverse rotation pulse Forward rotation pulse Data 1: Forward pulse/reverse pulse forward reverse signal signal A phase input...
  • Page 256 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) As shown in the above diagram, set input pulse frequency [kp/s] with function code d62 (Command (pulse string input) pulse scaling factor 1) and set frequency setting value [Hz] (when the input pulse frequency becomes the value set to function code d62) with function code d63 (Command (pulse string input) pulse scaling factor 2).
  • Page 257 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Operation method Select the operation command setting method. Indicate instruction method of run/stop and rotation direction (forward/reverse rotation) for each setting method. Operation command setting method F02 data Run/stop Rotation direction command 0: Keypad operation (Rotation direction input: Terminal keys...

  • Page 258: Wire Operation

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ◼ 2-wire operation Two types of 2-wire operation can be configured regardless of whether “DIR” is used. 2-wire operation (1) 2-wire operation (2) Forward 正転 Run/ rotation stop [FWD] Reverse 逆転...
  • Page 259 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Maximum output frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum output frequency that the inverter outputs. When the device to be driven is set to its rated value or higher, the device may be damaged. Make sure to adjust to design specification values of the machinery.
  • Page 260 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F04, F05 Base frequency 1, rated base frequency voltage 1 Maximum output voltage 1 Related function code: H50, H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency, Voltage) H52, H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency, Voltage) H65, H66 Non-linear V/f 3 (Frequency, Voltage) Set the base frequency and base frequency voltage that are essential to operation of the motor.
  • Page 261 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Base frequency (F04) Set the data in accordance with rated frequency of the motor (given on the nameplate of the motor). • Data setting range 5.0 to 599.0 (Hz) ■...
  • Page 262 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Acceleration time 1, Deceleration time 1 F07, F08 Related function code: E10, E12, E14 Acceleration time 2, 3, 4 E11, E13, E15 Deceleration time 2, 3, 4 H07 Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration H11 Deceleration mode H56 Deceleration time for forced stop H54 and H55 Acceleration/Deceleration time (Jogging...
  • Page 263 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Acceleration/deceleration time Function codes Type of Select ACC/DEC time acceleration/de Acceleration Deceleration ( Function codes E01 to E05) celeration time time time “RT2” “RT1” ACC/DEC time Changes are made with acceleration/deceleration selection ACC/DEC time “RT1”...

  • Page 264: S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) S-curve acceleration/deceleration For the purpose of decreasing the shock on the load machine, smooth the speed change at the start of acceleration and right before it becomes constant speed, and at the start of deceleration and right before the stop of deceleration.
  • Page 265 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Curve acceleration/deceleration This is a pattern to perform linear acceleration/deceleration (rated torque) at or below base frequency while acceleration becomes gradually slower at or higher than the base frequency, and acceleration/deceleration occurs with constant load rate (rated output).
  • Page 266 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ◼ Acceleration/deceleration time ratio setting with analog input (E61 to E63) By setting “12: Acceleration/deceleration time ratio” for analog input terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) (V2 function), the applicable analog input (0 to 100%) is multiplied by the selected acceleration/deceleration time in real time to set the acceleration/deceleration time ratio.
  • Page 267 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Select motor characteristics (F10) F10 selects characteristics of cooling system of the motor. F10 data Function Self-cooling fan of general-purpose motor (Self-cooling) (When operating with low frequency, cooling performance decreases.) Inverter-driven motor, High-speed motor with separately powered cooling fan (Keep constant cooling capability irrespective to output frequency) The electronic thermal operation characteristics diagram when F10 = 1 is set is shown below.
  • Page 268 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) When P99 = 1 or 3 (motor characteristic 1, 3) Thermal time Characteristics coefficient switch Characteristics Motor Thermal time constant setting frequency coefficient capacity constant τ Standard current 1 2 3 value Imax Base frequency x...
  • Page 269 150% of current is flowing continuously. Thermal time constant of general-purpose motor of Fuji Electric and other general motors is 5 minutes for 22 kW or lower, and 10 minutes for 30kW or higher. • Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (min) (Example) When the data of function code F12 is set to “5”...
  • Page 270 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Momentary power failure restart (Operation selection) Related function code: H13 Momentary power failure restart (Waiting time) H14 Momentary power failure restart (Frequency fall rate) H15 Momentary power failure restart (Continued operation level) H16 Momentary power failure restart (Allowable momentary power failure time)

  • Page 271: Operation Details

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) 5: Restart from starting When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time frequency when undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, the inverter output shuts down, and the motor coasts to a stop.
  • Page 272 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) V/f control with sensor (F42 = 3), Dynamic torque vector control with sensor (F42 = 4) Vector control with sensor (F42 = 6, 16) F14 data Operation details 0: Trip immediately When momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and at the time when undervoltage is detected by the DC link bus voltage of the inverter, undervoltage alarm LV is outputted, the inverter output shuts down, and the motor...
  • Page 273 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Momentary power failure restart (Basic operation: Without auto search setting) When inverter detected that DC link bus voltage becomes at or drops below undervoltage level while operating, it is judged as a momentary power failure. When load is light and momentary power failure is very short, momentary power failure may not be detected and motor operation might be continued because DC link bus voltage does not drop so much.
  • Page 274 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) When motor speed decreases during momentary power failure, and when restarting from frequency of before momentary power failure after power is recovered (auto-restarting), current limiter becomes active and output frequency of the inverter decreases automatically. When output frequency and motor rotation speed synchronize, the speed is accelerated up to the original output frequency.
  • Page 275 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Momentary power failure restart (Allowable momentary power failure time) (H16) Sets the maximum time from when momentary power failure (undervoltage level) occurs until restart (setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 s). Set coast to stop time which is allowable for machine and equipment. Momentary power failure restart operation should be performed within the specified time, however, if the set time is exceeded, the inverter judges the state as a power shut down, and then operates as powering on again without performing momentary power failure restart operation.
  • Page 276 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Momentary power failure restart (Waiting time) (H13) Set the time until restart is performed after momentary power failure occurred. (At auto search setting, use H46 (auto search holding time 2)). Restarting at the state when residual voltage of the motor is high, inrush current becomes greater or temporarily becomes at regeneration state, and overcurrent alarm may occur.
  • Page 277 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Momentary power failure restart (Continued operation level) (H15) Continued operation (P, I) (H92, H93) • Trip after momentary deceleration is stopped When trip after deceleration stopped is selected (F14 = 2), at momentary power failure restart operation (Mode selection), momentary power failure occurs while operating the inverter, and deceleration stop control starts when DC link bus voltage of the inverter becomes at or drops below the continuous running level.
  • Page 278 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F15, F16 Frequency limiter (Upper limit), Frequency limiter (Lower limit) Related function code: H63 Lower limit limiter (Operation selection) ■ Frequency limiter (Upper limit) (Lower limit) (F15, F16) F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency or reference frequency, respectively. Frequency limiter Object to which the limit is applied Frequency limiter (upper limit)
  • Page 279 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F20 to F22 DC braking 1 (Starting frequency, Operation level, Braking time) DC braking (Select motor characteristics) H195 DC braking (Braking time at the startup) These function codes specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate-to-a- stop operation.
  • Page 280 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Select motor characteristics (H95) H95 specifies the DC braking characteristics. H95 data Characteristics Note Slow response. Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may result at the the current, thereby preventing reverse start of DC braking.
  • Page 281 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Braking time at the startup (H195) When starting up inverter by run command, it is possible to start by operating DC braking. This is particularly useful in applications such as hoists and elevators where the inverter runs at low speed braking mode after starting up, preventing loads from falling.
  • Page 282 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F23 to F25 Starting frequency 1, Starting frequency 1 (Holding time) and Stop frequency Related function code: F38 and F39 (Stop frequency (Detection method) and Stop frequency (Holding time)) d24 (Zero speed control) Under V/f control At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency.
  • Page 283 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Sensorless vector control/Vector control with sensor At the startup, the inverter first starts at the “0” speed and accelerates to the starting frequency according to the specified acceleration time. After holding the starting frequency for the specified period, the inverter again accelerates to the reference speed according to the specified acceleration time.
  • Page 284 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Zero speed control (d24) (Under vector control with sensor and sensorless vector control (induction motors only)) To perform zero speed control, it is necessary to set the speed command (frequency command) below the starting and stop frequencies.
  • Page 285 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Stop frequency (Detection method) (F38) (Under vector control with sensor only) F38 specifies whether to use the actual speed or reference one as a decision criterion to shut down the inverter output.
  • Page 286 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F26, F27 Motor sound (Carrier frequency, Tone ) Related function code: H98 Protection/maintenance functions (Operation selection) ■ Motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26) Adjusts the carrier frequency. By changing carrier frequency, it is possible to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the main output (secondary) wiring.
  • Page 287 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Motor sound (Tone) (F27) F27 changes the motor running sound tone (only for motors under V/f control). This setting is effective when the carrier frequency specified by function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor.
  • Page 288 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Gain (F30, F60) F30, and F60 allow you to adjust the output voltage and current within the range of 0 to 300%. Monitored data ◼ Bias (F59, F63) F59 and F63 allow you to adjust the bias for the output voltage value and current value within the -100 to 0 to 100% range.
  • Page 289 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Function selection (F31, F61) F31 and F61 specify which data is monitored at output terminals [FM1] and [FM2]. An absolute value is output when unipolar. F31, F61 Subject of monitoring Content Definition of monitor amount 100% Data...
  • Page 290 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F31, F61 Subject of monitoring Content Definition of monitor amount 100% Data Reference frequency Setting frequency immediately (before Maximum output frequency before acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration 100% arithmetic unit calculation) 111 to Customizable logic Enable only at analog output 100%...
  • Page 291 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy-Saving Operation 1 Related function code: F09 Torque boost 1 H67 Auto energy-saving operation (Mode selection) F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy-saving operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load.
  • Page 292 If using a Fuji Electric motor (IE1), by selecting Fuji Electric motor 8-series by setting P99 to 0, and initializing the motor constants with H03, the torque boost is reset to an appropriate value.
  • Page 293 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) • Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under light load, auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over-excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor.
  • Page 294 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F40, F41 Torque limiter 1-1/Torque limiter 1-2 Related function code: E16, E17 Torque limiter 2-1, 2-2 H73 Torque limiter (Operating condition selection) H74 Torque limiter (Control target) H75 Torque limiter (Target quadrant) H76 Torque limiter (Braking) (Increasing frequency limiter) Under V/f control (F42 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4)
  • Page 295 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Torque limit control mode Under V/f control, torque limiting is performed by limiting torque current flowing across the motor. The graph below shows the relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque current limit.
  • Page 296 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Switching torque limiters The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command “TL2/TL1” (Select torque limiter level 2/1) assigned to any of the digital input terminals. To assign the Torque limiter 2/Torque limiter 1, “TL2/TL1”...
  • Page 297 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Under sensorless vector control/vector control with sensor (induction motors, PMSMs) (F42 = 5, 6, 15, 16) If the inverter’s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters, the inverter controls the speed regulator’s output (torque command) in speed control or a torque command in torque control in order to limit the motor-generating torque.
  • Page 298 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Torque limiter (Target quadrant) (H75) The settings for each quadrant (forward rotation drive/braking, reverse rotation drive/braking) for which torque limiter A and B are enabled can be selected from “Drive/braking torque limiter,” “4 identical quadrants torque limiter,”...
  • Page 299 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Applicable quadrant Limiting is applied by separating limit values into the upper limit value (torque limiter A) and 2: Upper limit/ the lower limit value (torque limiter B). lower limit Limiting is applied in the following patterns depending on the polarity of torque limiter A and torque limiter B Torque limit value A...
  • Page 300 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Control method selection 1 Related function code: H68 Slip compensation 1 (Operating condition selection) F42 specifies the motor drive control. For details on control methods, refer to Chapter 4 “4.6 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control”...
  • Page 301 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone H68 data Accl/Decel Constant speed Base frequency or below Above the base frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable...
  • Page 302 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ F42 = 15: Sensorless vector control (PMSMs) This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter's output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control. In addition, it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components, and controls each of those components in vector.
  • Page 303 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ■ Control parameters which are initialized when the control method F42 is changed If the control selection (F42) is changed from induction motor control (other than F42 = 15, 16) to PMSM control (F42 = 15, 16), the function code values in the following table are automatically changed to the initial values.
  • Page 304 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) F43, F44 Current limiter (Operation selection, Operation level) Related function code: H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limit (Operation selection) This is a dedicated V/f control function. It does not work under sensorless vector control or vector control with sensor.
  • Page 305 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) • Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it may cause a delay in control. If you need a quick response current limiting, also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12.
  • Page 306 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Example Braking resistor specifications Motor capacity Braking torque (%) Max. braking time (s) Permissible duty cycle %ED 11 kW 100% Discharge withstand current rating (kWs) = 5 s x 11 kW x 1 (100%) ÷ 2 = 27.5 kWs Permissible average loss (kW) = 0.1 (10%) x 11 kW x 1 (100%) ÷...
  • Page 307 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) Switching between HHD, HND, HD and ND modes It is possible to select from 4 types of running modes using function code F80. Select a running mode that is appropriate for the load equipment after checking the following table. For this model, the default setting for function code F80 differs depending on the destination set the first time the power is turned on.
  • Page 308 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) • Due to the above restrictions, if writing function codes continuously in ascending order by communication with RS-485, etc., be sure to write F80 first. • Motor capacities 1 to 2 (P02, A16) do not automatically move one rank up (or down). Configure to match the applicable motor capacity as required.

  • Page 309: E Codes (Extension Terminal Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) 第 5 章 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E01 to E05 Terminal [X1] to [X5] (Function selection) Related function code: E70 Shift key (Function selection) E98 Terminal [FWD] function selection E99 Terminal [REV] function selection E01 to E05, E98 and E99 assign commands to general-purpose, programmable, digital input terminals, [X1] to [X5], [FWD], and [REV].
  • Page 310 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Data Related function Active Defined function Signal name Code ― Switch to commercial power (50 Hz) “SW50” ― Switch to commercial power (60 Hz) “SW60” ― 1017 UP command “UP”...
  • Page 311 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Data Related function Active Defined function Signal name Code 1072 Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 1 “CRUN-M1” ― 1073 Count the run time of commercial power-driven motor 2 “CRUN-M2”...
  • Page 312 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Terminal function assignment and data setting ■ Select multistep frequency “SS1,” “SS2,” “SS4,” and “SS8” assignment (Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and 3) The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “SS1,” “SS2,” “SS4” and “SS8” selects one of 16 different frequency commands.
  • Page 313 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ DC braking command “DCBRK” assignment (Function code data = 13) Turning “DCBRK” terminal command ON gives the inverter a DC braking command. (Requirements for DC braking must be satisfied.) (...
  • Page 314 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) <Operation timing scheme> • When the motor speed remains almost the same during free run: 0.1 s or more 0.2 s or more Switch to commercial power “SW50” Forward rotation/stop command “FWD”...
  • Page 315 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) <Sequence circuit example> Main circuit power Operation switch Forward rotation Commercial command Coast-to-a-stop power Commercial power Normal Emergency Stop Inverter Alarm Note 2) Note 1) Emergency Alarm Emergency Normal switch Commercial power...
  • Page 316 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) <Operation chart example> Inverter Commercial power Inverter operation operation operation Stop Run command Alarm generated Alarm Select commercial power Inverter Commercial power Inverter Inverter primary Inverter secondary delay timer T3 (on- delay) Inverter secondary Switch to commercial...
  • Page 317 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Cancel PID control “Hz/PID” assignment (Function code data = 20) Turning this terminal command “Hz/PID” ON disables PID control. If the PID control is disabled with this command, the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multistep frequency, keypad, analog input, etc.
  • Page 318 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) • When process control is performed by the PID processor integrated in the inverter: The terminal command “Hz/PID” (“Cancel PID control”) can switch PID control between enabled (process is to be controlled by the PID processor) and disabled (process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting).
  • Page 319 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Universal DI “U-DI” assignment (Function code data = 25) Digital signals from the inverter's peripheral devices can be connected to the inverter's digital input and monitored via RS-485 communication or fieldbus communications link. Input terminals assigned to “U-DI” are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter.
  • Page 320 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Run enable “RE” assignment (Function code data = 38) By assigning “RE” to a digital input, the inverter is not started with run command input alone. After inputting a run command, the “AX2”...
  • Page 321 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Battery/UPS operation selection “BATRY/UPS” assignment (Function code data = 59) The Battery operation can drive the motor during undervoltage situation. It is intended to drive a load to its normal position with a low-voltage or small-capacity emergency battery/UPS when, for example, an elevator cannot stop in its normal position due to a power failure.
  • Page 322 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) • UPS operation (for operation with models 22 kW or below) The motor can be operated by an inverter in a state of undervoltage by UPS power. If function code data is changed during undervoltage, an er1 alarm or erf alarm may occur.
  • Page 323 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) • Battery operation (for operation with FRN0088E3□-2G or above FRN0059E3□-4G or above) The motor can be operated by an inverter in a state of undervoltage by battery power. Prerequisite of battery operation Terminal function “BATRY/UPS”...
  • Page 324 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Time T1 from “BATRY/UPS” ON to 73X ON Power supply condition Time required for turning on the control power supply, switching to the power supply from the 100 ms battery, and then to turning on the charging resistor short circuit 73X Time required from the occurrence of momentary power failure in the control power supply 205 ms...
  • Page 325 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Cancel line speed control -- “Hz/LSC” assignment (Function code data = 70) Turning ON “Hz/LSC” cancels line speed control. This disables the frequency compensation of PI operation, resulting in no compensation for a take-up roll getting bigger and an increase in the winding speed. Use this signal to temporarily interrupt the control for repairing a thread break, for example.
  • Page 326 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Select speed control parameters 1, 2 “MPRM1”, “MPRM2” assignment (Function code data = 78, 79) The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals “MPRM1” and “MPRM2” selects one of 4 different level speed control parameter sets.
  • Page 327 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ PG input switching “PG-SEL” assignment (Function code data = 83) The PG option card command/feedback channel can be changed with “PG-SEL.” Switching is possible only while the inverter is stopped. If terminal operation is performed while the inverter is running, it will stop before switching. This function cannot be used with synchronous motor drive with sensor.
  • Page 328 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Forward JOG “FJOG,” Reverse JOG “RJOG” assignment (Function code data = 94, 95) This is valid only when performing terminal block operation (F02 = 1). Jogging operation can be performed in the forward direction or reverse direction with “FJOG”...
  • Page 329 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E10 to E15 Acceleration time 2 to 4, Deceleration time 2 to 4 (Refer to F07) Acceleration/deceleration time 2 to 4 settings are described in detail at the function code F07 section. E16, E17 Torque limiter 2 (driving), 2 (braking) (Refer to F40) For the torque limiter 2 (driving) and 2 (braking) settings, refer to the description of F40.
  • Page 330 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Data Related function Active Defined function Signal name codes/related signals (data) 1016 Pattern operation stage transition "TU" C21, C22 to C28 1017 Pattern operation cycle completed "TO" 1018 Pattern operation stage No. 1 “STG1”...
  • Page 331 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Data Related function Active Defined function Signal name codes/related signals (data) 1080 Stop position override alarm “OT” 1081 Under positioning “TO” J73 to J88 1082 Positioning complete "PSET" 1083 Current position count over-flowed "POF"...
  • Page 332 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Inverter running “RUN” assignment (Function code data = 0), Inverter outputting “RUN2” assignment (Function code data = 35) These output signals tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher. If assigned in negative logic (Active OFF), these signals can be used to tell the “Inverter being stopped”...
  • Page 333 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Auto-restarting after momentary power failure “IPF” assignment (Function code data = 6) This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period after the inverter detects an undervoltage condition and shuts down the output until restart has been completed (the output has reached the reference frequency).
  • Page 334 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Pattern operation stage transition “TU” assignment (Function code data = 16) When transitioning between stages during pattern operation, a 1 shot (100 ms) ON signal is output, indicating that the stage has changed.
  • Page 335 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Universal DO “U-DO” assignment (Function code data = 27) Assigning this output signal to an inverter's output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment, allows an upper controller to send commands to the peripheral equipment via the RS-485 or the fieldbus communications link.
  • Page 336 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Low current detection “IDL”, “IDL2” assignment (Function code data = 41, 133) When the inverter output current falls to or below the current detection (operation) level specified by E34, E37 or E55 for the current detection (timer) period specified by E35, E38 or E56, the IDL or IDL2 signal turns ON, respectively (minimum output signal range: 100 ms).
  • Page 337 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ In remote mode “RMT” assignment (Function code data = 54) This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode.  For details of switching between remote and local modes, refer to Chapter 3 “3.3.7 Switching between remote and local modes”.
  • Page 338 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Low DC link bus voltage detection “U-EDC” assignment (Function code data = 77) This output signal comes ON when the DC intermediate voltage drops below E76 (DC link bus low-voltage detection level), and it goes OFF when the DC intermediate voltage exceeds E76.
  • Page 339 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Alarm content “AL1”, “AL2”, “AL4”, “AL8” assignment (Function code data = 90, 91, 92, 93) Outputs the state of operation of the inverter protective functions. Output terminal Alarm content (inverter protective function) Alarm code Instantaneous overcurrent protection 0C1 to 0C3...
  • Page 340 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) ■ Customizable logic output signal 1 to 14 “CLO1” to “CLO14” assignment (Function code data = 111 to 124) Outputs the result of customizable logic operation. ( Function code U codes) ■...
  • Page 341 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Frequency arrival delay (FAR2) Frequency arrival detection range (Detection range) E30 specifies the detection level for the Frequency (speed) arrival signal “FAR,” Frequency (speed) arrival signal 2 “FAR2” and the Frequency (speed) arrival signal 3 “FAR3”. E20 to E24, E27 Output signal Operating condition 1...
  • Page 342 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Frequency setting change Frequency setting Reference frequency (1)+E30 Reference frequency (1) Reference frequency (1)-E30 Reference frequency (2)+E30 Reference frequency (2) Output frequency Reference frequency (2)-E30 Frequency arrival “FAR” Frequency Frequency arrival delay E29 arrival delay Frequency arrival 2 “FAR2”...
  • Page 343 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E31, E32 Frequency detection (Operation level and hysteresis range) Related function code: E36 (Frequency detection 2, level), E54 (Frequency detection 3, level) When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31, the “Frequency (speed) detection signal”...
  • Page 344 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) • Data setting range Operation level: 0.00 A (disable), current value of 1 to 200% of inverter rated current set in A (ampere) units Motor characteristics 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor with self-cooling fan) 2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with separately powered cooling fan) ■...
  • Page 345 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E37, E38 Current detection 2/Low current detection (Operation level and Timer time) (Refer to E34) For details about Current detection 2/Low current detection (Operation level, Timer), refer to the description of E34. Constant feed time coefficient time Related function code: E50, A61 (Display coefficient for speed monitor) E39 specifies the constant-rate feeding time, load shaft speed, coefficient for line speed setting, and coefficient for...
  • Page 346 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) LED monitor (Item selection) Related function code: E48 LED monitor details (Speed monitor selection) Selects the operating state monitor information displayed on the keypad LED. Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed-monitoring formats selectable with E48 (LED monitor).
  • Page 347 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Display sample on Monitor items LED indicator Unit Meaning of displayed value E43 data the LED monitor Torque current command value or calculated Torque current 〇Hz〇A〇kW torque current Magnetic flux command value Magnetic flux command 〇Hz〇A〇kW (Available only under vector control with...
  • Page 348 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) LED monitor (Display when stopped) Selects monitor information displayed with the keypad LEDs while the inverter is stopped. If E44 = 0, the set frequency is displayed, and when E44 = 1, the output frequency is displayed. The display format is that selected with Speed monitor E48.
  • Page 349 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Related data is the following. These data are displayed and submitted with polarity. Judge the meaning of the polarity by E49 setting. Torque data Data Related data E43=8 Calculated torque Keypad LED monitor E43=23 Torque current...
  • Page 350 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Display coefficient for “Input watt-hour data” E51 specifies a display coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour data (5_10) in a part of maintenance information on the keypad. Integral power data = Display coefficient (E51 data) x Integral power consumption (kWh) •...
  • Page 351 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Integral power pulse output unit By setting “POUT” integral power pulse output to the digital output terminals with E20 to E24, or E27, a 0.15 s pulse can be output each time the integral power consumption increase reaches the unit amount selected with this function code.
  • Page 352 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E61, E62, Function Description E63 data Multiplies the final frequency command value by this value, for use in the constant line speed control by calculating the winder diameter or in ratio operation with multiple inverters. Ratio setting 100%/full scale Effective range: -200% to 200%...
  • Page 353 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E61, E62, Function Description E63 data By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as the temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter, you can monitor the state of external devices via the communications link. By using an appropriate display coefficient, you can also have Analog input monitor various values to be converted into physical quantities such as...
  • Page 354 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Reference loss detection (continued operation frequency) When the analog frequency command (setting with terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function), or [C1] (V2 function) has dropped below 10% of the reference frequency within 400 ms, the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency.
  • Page 355 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) Shift key (Function selection) M-LED indicator (Function selection) By setting the same value as E01 for E70, the same commands (with certain exceptions) as those for the X terminal function can be assigned to the Shift key on the standard keypad, and M/Shift key on the optional remote keypad TP-E2.
  • Page 356 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions) E78, E79 Torque detection 1 (Operation level and Timer time) E80, E81 Torque detection 2 (Operation level and Timer time) Specifies the operation level and timer time for torque detection 1 “TD1,” torque detection 2 “TD2” or low torque detection “U-TL.”...
  • Page 357 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) C01 to C04 Jump frequency 1, 2 and 3, Jump frequency (Skip range) C94 to C96 Jump frequency 4 to 6 Up to six jump frequency bands can be set for the output frequency in order to avoid resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery (load).
  • Page 358 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) C05 to C19 Multistep frequency 1 to 15 ■ These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15. Turning terminal commands “SS1,” “SS2,” “SS4” and “SS8” ON/OFF selectively switches the reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps.
  • Page 359 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) Jogging frequency Related function codes: H54 and H55 Acceleration/deceleration time (Jogging operation) d09 to d13 Speed control (JOG) C20 specifies the operating condition (frequency) to apply in jogging operation. Function codes Permissible setting range Description Jogging frequency...
  • Page 360 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) Pattern operation/Timed operation (Mode selection) C22 to C28 Stage 1 to 7 Pattern operation is a function of automatic operation according to the predefined run time, rotational direction, acceleration/deceleration time and reference frequency. When using this function, set the frequency setting (F01) to 10 (pattern operation).
  • Page 361 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ■ Reference frequency Multistep frequencies 1 to 7 are assigned to the reference frequency of Stage 1 to 7. ■ Example of pattern operation setting Rotational Acceleration/dec Run time Operation (reference) direction eleration time (Operation...
  • Page 362 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) To run or stop, use input from the key of the keypad or by switching the control terminal. Taking the keypad as an example, the motor starts running when the key is pressed.
  • Page 363 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) Frequency setting 2 (Refer to F01) For details on Frequency setting 2, refer to the description for function code F01. C31 to C35 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12]) (Offset, Gain, Filter, Gain base point, Polarity selection) C36 to C40 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (Offset, Gain, Filter, Gain base point, Mode selection)
  • Page 364 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ■ Polarity selection for terminal [C1] (V2 function) (C45) C35, C45, and C78 configure the polarity, and therefore the input range for analog input voltage. C40 data Terminal input specification -10 to +10 V When bias values are set to minus, below 0 point as minus value is enabled.
  • Page 365 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) ■ Gain, bias Terminal PID command, feedback, analog monitor Reference frequency Gain Point B [12] Bias Point A Analog input Bias base Gain base point point Reference frequency Gain Point B [C1] (C1 function) Bias Point A...
  • Page 366 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) Bias (for frequency setting 1) (Bias base point) (Refer to F01) For details on Frequency setting 1 bias reference point settings, refer to the description for function code F01. Forward/reverse operation selection (Frequency setting 1) Forward/reverse operation selection (Frequency setting 2) Switches between the analog frequency setting forward operation and reverse operation.
  • Page 367 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.3 C codes (Control Functions) C59, C60 Analog input adjustment (terminal [12]) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale) C65, C66 Analog input adjustment (terminal [C1] (C1 function)) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale) C71, C72 Analog input adjustment (terminal [V2]) (Maximum scale, Minimum scale) Values of the analog input monitor (terminals [12], [V2], and [C1] (C1 and V3 functions) can be converted into easily recognizable physical quantities for display.

  • Page 368: P Codes (Motor 1 Parameters)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto energy saving operation, torque limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), auto search for idling motor speed, slip compensation, vector control without speed sensor (torque vector), droop control, and overload stop, it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters including the motor capacity and rated current.
  • Page 369 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) Motor 1 (Auto tuning) The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory. If using a Fuji standard motor (incl. old model IE1 induction motors and synchronous motors) with a standard connection method, there is generally no need to perform tuning.
  • Page 370 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) In any of the following cases, perform auto-tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under some conditions. In cases such as this, perform auto tuning.
  • Page 371 (100 % or more) may cause hunting (undesirable oscillation of the system), so carefully check the operation on the actual machine. P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify the default setting. If you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives. Function codes Operation (slip compensation) Slip compensation gain (for Adjust the slip compensation for driving.
  • Page 372 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) Motor 1 (Rated slip frequency) Sets the motor rated slip. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor. Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters. •...
  • Page 373 Depending on the synchronous motor characteristics, it may not be method for IPMSM possible to use this method. This method can be used with the Fuji Electric standard synchronous motor GNB2 series. The reference current for polarity discrimination specified by P87 applies. Usually it is not necessary to change the factory default.
  • Page 374 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) When adopting vector control with sensor for synchronous motors, the starting operation will be as shown in the following table based on each function code combination. F42 data d14 data P95 data P30 data Operation when starting...
  • Page 375 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) Motor 1 (Torque current under vector control) Sets the torque current rated value under vector control with sensor. The combination of P99 (Motor 1 selection) and P02 (Motor 1 rated capacity) data determines the standard value. To change the standard value, do so after specifying these settings.
  • Page 376 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.4 P codes (Motor 1 parameters) Motor 1 (Control switching level) These are the control parameters for PMSMs. Normally, it is not necessary to change the data of these function codes. Motor 1 (Overcurrent protection level) Sets the synchronous motor demagnetization limit current value with an effective value.
  • Page 377 [H71] to 1 or 2). deceleration time in the case of commonly used V/F control • Increase the deceleration time under deceleration (Fuji Electric inverter function characteristics, and in the code [F08]). worst case, overvoltage • Or set torque limiting anti- protection is triggered.

  • Page 378: H Codes (High-Performance Functions)

    • When all function codes are initialized, select the initialization method in advance with function code H02. H02 selection Initialization method when 1 is set to H03 Fuji standard initial Initialize all function codes with the Fuji Electric standard factory Data = 0 value defaults.
  • Page 379 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) • Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V/f control. When the base frequency, rated voltage, and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors, or when non-Fuji motors or non- standard motors are used, change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate.
  • Page 380 The setting value saved and protected here can be selected as the user preference dataset for initialization with function code H03. When this function is used, set H02 data = 1. If initialization is performed without saved/protected setting data, it is initialized to the Fuji Electric standard factory default regardless of the H02 value.
  • Page 381 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H04, H05 Auto-reset (Times and reset interval) H04 and H05 specify the auto-reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm output (for any alarm) even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop state (tripped state).
  • Page 382 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) • If the retry count exceeds 3 times (H04 = 3), and an integrated alarm is output Protective function Tripped state Tripped state reset command Inverter output frequency Auto-resetting [TRY] Alarm output (for any alarm) [ALM] Time...
  • Page 383 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H09, d67 Startup characteristics (Auto search mode) Related function codes: H49 (Startup characteristics (Auto search time 1)) H46 (Startup characteristics (Auto search time 2)) Specify the mode for auto search without stopping the idling motor. The mode can be specified for each restart after momentary power failure and each start of normal operation.
  • Page 384 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Startup characteristics (Auto search time 2) (H46) • Data setting range: 0.1 to 20.0 (s) At the restart after a momentary power failure, at the start by turning the terminal command “BX” (“Coast-to-a-stop”) OFF and ON, or at the restart by auto-reset, the inverter applies the auto search time specified by H46.
  • Page 385 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H13, H14 Momentary power failure restart (Waiting time, Frequency fall rate) H15, H16 Momentary power failure restart (Continued operation level, Allowable momentary power failure time) (Refer to F14) For how to set these function codes (Waiting time, Frequency fall rate, Continued operation level and Allowable momentary power failure time), refer to the description of function code F14.

  • Page 386: Torque Command

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Torque control (Operation selection) (H18) H18 specifies whether to enable or disable the torque control. Enabling the torque control offers two choices: with torque current command and with torque command. H18 data Available control Disable (Speed control)
  • Page 387 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Speed limits 1 and 2 (d32, d33) Torque control mode controls the motor-generating torque directly, not the speed. The speed is determined secondarily by torque of the load, inertia of the machinery, and other factors. To prevent a dangerous situation, therefore, the speed limit functions (d32 and d33) are provided inside the inverter.
  • Page 388 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Thermistor (for motor 1, 2) (Operation selection) Thermistor (for motor 1, 2) (Operation level) These function codes specify the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded in the motor. The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or outputting an alarm signal. If using this function in conjunction with motor switching, use PTC thermistors with identical characteristics for each motor, and switch motors before inputting data to terminal [C1].
  • Page 389 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Thermistor (for motor1, 2) (Operation level) (H27) H27 specifies the operation level (expressed in voltage) for the PTC thermistor. • Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V) The alarm temperature at which the overheat protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor.

  • Page 390: Droop Control

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Droop control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery, any speed gap between inverter-driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors. Droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristic for increasing its load, eliminating such kind of load unbalance.
  • Page 391 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Link functions (Operation selection) Link functions (Actual terminal operation selection) Related function codes: y94 Link function (X terminal operation selection) y98 Bus function (Operation selection) Using the RS-485 communications link, built-in CAN communications link, or fieldbus (option) allows you to issue frequency settings and run operation commands (equivalent to stop running/digital input terminal) from a computer or PLC at a remote location, as well as monitor the inverter running information and the function code data.
  • Page 392 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H30 and y98 settings by combination of sources Frequency setting RS-485 RS-485 Via fieldbus Inverter itself communications communications (Option) (Port 1) Port 2 H30 = 0 H30 = 1 H30 = 4 H30 = 0 (1, 4) Inverter itself y98 = 0...
  • Page 393 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ y94: Link function (X terminal operation selection) Bus command enable/disable is selected all at once with a run operation command (stop running/digital input) with y98 and H30, but if setting stop running ([FWD], [REV]) to commands with actual terminals, set F02 = 1 and y94 = 1.
  • Page 394 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor (H42) Calculating the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor • The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter’s internal load conditions, e.g. options attached or ON/OFF of digital I/O signals.
  • Page 395 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) [ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial value at time of shipment When bit 3 of H98 data is 0, the measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF.
  • Page 396 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) [ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions at power shutdown When bit 3 of H98 data is 1, the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF.
  • Page 397 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Cumulative run time of capacitors on PCBs (H48) Function codes Name Content Electrolytic capacitors on Displays the cumulative run time for the capacitor on the PCBs PCBs. Cumulative run time •...
  • Page 398 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H50, H51 Non-linear V/f 1 (Frequency and Voltage) (Refer to F04) H52, H53 Non-linear V/f 2 (Frequency and Voltage) The non-linear V/f pattern setting is described in detail in the function code F04 section. H54, H55 Acceleration/Deceleration time (Jogging operation) (Refer to F07)
  • Page 399 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Anti-regenerative control (Operation selection) H114 Anti-regenerative control (Operation level) Related function code: H76 Torque limiter (Braking, Increasing frequency limiter) Enable the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control) with this function code. If the inverter is not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit, when the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter’s braking capability, an overvoltage trip occurs.
  • Page 400 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Anti-regenerative control (Operation level) (H114) Allows the adjustment of the operation level when anti-regenerative control by torque limiter is performed with H69 = 2, 4. Basically, there is no need to modify the setting. H114 data Function Adjusted operation level...
  • Page 401 With power supply via a PWM converter or DC link bus, there is no AC input. When the data for H72 is “1,” the inverter cannot operate. Change the data for H72 to “0.” For single-phase power supply, consult your Fuji Electric representative. Torque limiter (Operating condition selection)
  • Page 402 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) The cumulative run time of the motor can be indicated by keypad operation. It can be used for management of the machinery or maintenance. Specifying an arbitrary time for the cumulative motor run time 1 (H94) allows an arbitrary value to be specified for the cumulative motor run time.
  • Page 403 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Maintenance timer “MNT” (Function code E20 to E21, E27, data = 84) When the startup counter for motor 1 (H44) reaches the number specified by H79 (Preset startup count for maintenance (M1)), the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal “MNT”...
  • Page 404 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H81, H82, Warning selection 1 to 3 If the inverter detects a minor abnormality when detecting an error, the display alternates between the warning code* and operating status monitor (frequency display, etc.), and operation can be continued without tripping the inverter.
  • Page 405 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Selecting warning factors To set and display the applicable selection in hexadecimal format, the selectable factor is assigned to bits 0 to 15 in the bit assignment tables for H81 to H83 below. Set the bit that corresponds to the cause to be selected to “1.” The selection status for warnings can be expressed in binary or hexadecimal notation as shown in the selection factor display example.
  • Page 406 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Display of warning factors (Example) Warning factors “RS-485 communication error (COM port 2),” “RS-485 communication error (COM port 1),” “Option communications error,” “Overload of motor 1” and “Cooling fin overheat” are selected by H81.
  • Page 407 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H84, H85 Pre-excitation (Level, Time) A motor generates torque with magnetic flux and torque current. Lag elements of the rising edge of magnetic flux causes a phenomenon in which enough torque is not generated at the moment of the motor start. To obtain enough torque even at the moment of motor start, enable the pre-excitation with H84 and H85 so that magnetic flux is established before a motor start.
  • Page 408 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Under V/f control (including auto torque boost and torque vector), pre-excitation is disabled, so use DC braking or hold the starting frequency instead. A transient phenomenon, which may occur when the losses of the machinery (load) are small, may make the motor rotate during pre-excitation.
  • Page 409 Due caution is advised when using this function. • Confirm that this function can be used safely when combined with other applications. • Users are responsible for enabling this function. Fuji Electric accepts no responsibility. Failure to observe this could result in an accident.
  • Page 410 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) Clear alarm data Related function code: H45 Simulated failure Clears information (alarm history, relevant information when alarm occurs) for alarms that occur when performing machine adjustment, and returns the converter to the state before the alarm occurred. To clear alarm data, simultaneous keying of “...
  • Page 411 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) DC link bus capacitor life judgment (Bit 4) Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached the end of its life is judged by measuring the discharging time after power OFF. The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter.
  • Page 412 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.5 H codes (High-performance Functions) H99, Password 2 setting/comparison H197, User password 1 (Protective operation selection, Setting/comparison) H198 User password protection active H199 The password function is the function to hide the function code entirely/partially which is set for the inverter. When this function is used, perform correct settings after familiarizing yourself with the following details.
  • Page 413 H197 and set the disable) (Inverter Perform data initialization password to function code H198. operation disable) [H03=1] with Fuji Electric standard initial value [H02=0]. Set incorrect passwords Perform data intialization to function code H198. [H03=1] with Fuji Electric (No.
  • Page 414 (Funct ion code read/write Set the password to function code disable) (Inverter H99. operation disable) Perform data intialization [H02=0] with Fuji Electric standard initial value [H03=1]. Set lncorrect passwords to function code H198. (No. of specified times). Set incorrect passwords to function code H99.

  • Page 415: H1 Codes (High-Performance Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) H101 Destination Refer to Chapter 4 “4.4 Destination Setting.” H111 UPS operation level Specifies the voltage level at which the inverter can operate the motor by UPS operation. For details, refer to “■ UPS operation”...
  • Page 416 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Forced operation (Fire Mode) (Operation selection) (H116) • Data setting range: 0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21, 22 By setting H116, it is possible to select from a total of nine operation modes by combining the three types of forced operation end timing (ON, toggle, latch) and three types of alarm subject to an automatic reset (FMS-1, 2, 3).
  • Page 417 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Forced operation (Fire Mode) (Reference frequency) (H118) Sets the reference speed (reference frequency) when forced operation (Fire Mode) is enabled. H118 data Function This is based on the reference frequency selected with Frequency setting 1 (F01) and Frequency setting 2 (C30).
  • Page 418 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) H154 Torque bias (Function selection) H155 to H157 (Level 1 to 3) H158 (Mechanical loss compensation) H159 (Startup timer) H161 (Shutdown timer) H162 (Limiter) Torque bias value is added to the torque command output by the speed controller for vector control with sensor. As a result of this, a significant amount of torque can be output with no speed deviation when starting.
  • Page 419 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) ■ Torque bias (Mechanical loss compensation) (H158) Use this function to compensate the amount of the mechanical loss of a load. Data setting range: 0 to 300.00 (%) of a motor rated torque ■...
  • Page 420 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.6 H1 codes (High-performance Functions) H173 Magnetic flux level at light load This function decreases the motor magnetic flux at light load and can reduce the motor noise. This can only be used under vector control with sensor. The motor magnetic flux command is controlled in proportion to torque current command that is less than 50%.

  • Page 421: A Codes (Motor 2 Parameters)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.7 A codes (Motor 2 parameters) 5.3.7 A codes (Motor 2 parameters) FRENIC-Ace allows you to switch between 2 motors and perform operation using the same inverter. ( Function codes E01 to E05, data = 12) Function codes Motor to drive Remarks...
  • Page 422 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.7 A codes (Motor 2 parameters) Function codes Name Motor 1 Motor 2 (Slip compensation response time) (Slip compensation gain for braking) (Rated slip frequency) Motor (Iron loss coefficient 1) (%X correction coefficient 1) Motor selection Slip compensation (Operating condition selection) Current fluctuation damping gain for motor...
  • Page 423 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.8 b, r codes (Speed control 3 and 4) 5.3.8 b, r codes (Speed control 3 and 4) FRENIC-Ace has four sets of speed control parameters. They can be selected by “MPRM1” and “MPRM2” signals. The selection made with speed control selection signals “MPRM1”...
  • Page 424 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Chapter 5 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID control (Operation selection) Under PID control, the inverter detects the state of a control target object with a sensor or similar device and compares it with the commanded value (e.g., temperature control command).
  • Page 425 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Operation selection (J01) J01 data Function J01 selects the PID control operation and control block. Disable Process control (forward operation) Process control (reverse operation) Speed control (dancer) <Block diagram of PID process control> Manual speed command Frequency command...

  • Page 426: 1 ] Pid Command By Keypad J02 (J02＝0)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID control (Remote command) Related function codes J105: PID control (Display unit) J106: PID control (Maximum scale) J107: PID control (Minimum scale) J136 to J138: PID control (Multistep commands 1 to 3) Select the method used to set PID control command values.

  • Page 427: 2 ] Pid Command 1 By Analog Inputs (J02 = 1)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) [ 2 ] PID command 1 by analog inputs (J02 = 1) The desired value can be set for the PID command value by analog input by multiplying by the gain and adding the bias.
  • Page 428 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Gain, bias Reference frequency Gain Point B (C32, C37, C42) Bias (C51, C55, C67)7)67) Point A Analog input Bias base Gain base point point (C52, C56, C62, C68) (C34, C39, C44) (Example) In order to allocate for the range of 0 to 100% to the range of 1 to 5 V at terminal [12], set as follows.

  • Page 429: 3 ] Pid Command With Up/Down Control (J02 = 3)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) [ 3 ] PID command with UP/DOWN control (J02 = 3) When UP/DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command, turning the terminal command “UP” or “DOWN” ON causes the PID set point value to change within the range from minimum scale to maximum scale. Settings can be specified in physical system units with display units (J105), maximum scale (J106), and minimum scale (J107).
  • Page 430 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) (For winders) Example 1: When an external sensor has an output range of -7 to +7 VDC: • As this is voltage input, use terminal [12]. • When the external sensor has ±7 VDC of bipolar output, inside the inverter ±7 VDC should be equivalent to ±100%.
  • Page 431 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID control P (Gain) PID control I (Integral time) PID control D (Differential time) PID control Feedback filter Related function codes: J59: P (Gain) 2 J60: I (Integral time) 2 J61: D (Differential time) 2 ■...
  • Page 432 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ I integral time (J04) These function codes set the PID controller integral time. • Data setting range: 0.0 to 3600.0 (s) 0.0 indicates that the integral component is disabled. I (Integral) action An operation in which the change rate of the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action, which outputs the MV that integrates the deviation.
  • Page 433 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) The combined uses of P, I, and D actions are described below. PI control PI control, which is a combination of P and I actions, is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused by P action.
  • Page 434 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) The method for refining the system response from the waveforms is shown below. Suppressing overshoot Increase the data of J04 (Integral time) and decrease that of J05 (Differential time). After refinement Response Before...
  • Page 435 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) J08, J09 PID control (Pressurization starting frequency, Pressurizing time) Related function codes: J15 (Low liquid level stop/start frequency level) J16 (Low liquid level stop elapsed time) J17 (Starting frequency) J23 (Low liquid level stop/start feedback deviation) J24 (Low liquid level stop/start delay time) Low liquid level stop functions (J15 to J17, J23, J24) Function codes J15 to J17 configure the low liquid level stop function in pump control, a function that stops the...
  • Page 436 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ PID control (Low liquid level stop/start feedback deviation) (J23) ■ PID control (Low liquid level stop/start delay time) (J24) When both of the two conditions below are satisfied (AND condition), the inverter is restarted. •...
  • Page 437 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID control (Anti-reset wind-up) J10 suppresses overshoot in control with the PID processor. As long as the error between the feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range, the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration operation. •...
  • Page 438 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ PID Control (Upper limit alarm (AH)) (J12) J12 specifies the upper limit alarm (AH) in percentage (%) of the feedback value. ■ PID Control (Lower limit alarm (AL)) (J13) J13 specifies the lower limit alarm (AL) in percentage (%) of the feedback value.
  • Page 439 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID Control (Upper limit of PID output) PID Control (Lower limit of PID output) The upper and lower limits can be specified for the PID output, exclusively used for PID control. The settings are ignored when PID cancel “Hz/PID”...
  • Page 440 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) PID Control (Dancer standard position) J57 specifies the dancer standard position in the range of -100% to +100% for dancer control. If J02 = 0 (keypad) is selected, this function code is applied for the dancer standard position. It is also possible to modify the set point (PID command) with the keys on the keypad.

  • Page 441: 5 ] Overload Stop Functions

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) [ 5 ] Overload stop functions J63 to J67 Overload stop functions (Detection value, Detection level, Operation selection, Operation mode, Timer time) J90 to J92 Overload stop functions (Torque limiter P (Gain), Torque limiter I (Integral time), Current command level) Detects an overload status and if it exceeds the specified detection level (J64) for the specified timer duration (J67), the operation is stopped based on the selected action (J65).
  • Page 442 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Stopper hit Motor speed/output frequency Decelerate to stop or coast to a stop Detection level Current/torque Timer Operation selection J65 = 1, 2 Stopper hit Motor speed/output frequency Torque limit control Detection level (J64) Torque Current limiting level (J92)

  • Page 443: 6 ] Brake Control Signal

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Torque limiter I (Integral time) (J91) If the torque limiting operation response is slow when the Contacting the stopper function is selected, decrease the integral time, and if hunting occurs, increase the integral time. ■...
  • Page 444 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Check brake signal “BRKE” (Function code E20 to E21, data = 65) If the status of Machine brake signal control “BRKS” fails to agree with the status of Check brake “BRKE” during inverter operation, the inverter enters an alarm stop state with er6.
  • Page 445 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Brake-apply frequency/speed Brake-release F23: Starting frequency 1 frequency/speed Stop frequency Output frequency Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency (holding time) (holding time) J68: Brake-release current Output current Run command Brake control signal BRKS Brake-release timer Brake-apply timer Operation time chart under v/f control...
  • Page 446 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Dedicated reverse rotation brake signal function codes If necessary to make individual adjustments with forward rotation or reverse rotation, do so with the following dedicated reverse rotation function codes. If data = 999, operation will be performed with the J code function code setting value.

  • Page 447: 7 ] Positioning Control

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) [ 7 ] Positioning control Positioning control J73 to J88 Simplified positioning is possible with the feedback signal from PG. The feedback signals are counted within the inverter, operation starts from the set start point, and deceleration starts and the system switches to low-speed operation until the set stop position is reached.
  • Page 448 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Functional description The encoder output pulse is counted within the inverter using the PG option, operation starts from the set start point (S point), deceleration starts and the system switches to low-speed operation until the set stop position (E point) is reached.
  • Page 449 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Symbol list The symbols in Figure 5.3-1 are shown in Table 5.3-6. Table 5.3-6 Symbol list Function Symbol Name Content codes Start point J74, J75 Sets the data of the position where positioning starts. The way the start position point data is handled differs when the start point setting is displayed as [P] (absolute position) and when it is displayed as setting values other than [P] (relative...
  • Page 450 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) The waiting time until it becomes possible to input the next positioning start signal End timer after the system stops at the stop position. After the system stops at the positioning completion, the positioning complete signal “PSET”...
  • Page 451 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Input/output terminal functions Table 5.3-7 List of I/O terminal functions Terminal functions Terminal name Description Activate the limit “LS” Terminal used when replacing the current position with the switch at start point position preset (Z point) setting value (Z point compensation).
  • Page 452 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Table Output terminal functions Terminal Terminal name Description functions Stop position “OT” ON condition override Over Stop ET ends (after 0.5 s. when ET < 0.5 s.) alarm position when｜real stop point - stop position (E point)｜> ER set value OFF condition Conditions other than the above Positioning...
  • Page 453 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Positioning Displays the deviation between the current position 3_19 deviation pulse count and the stop position pulse count. Positioning Displays the number of the positioning control control function 3_20 function status shown in Fig. 5.3-2 Fig.
  • Page 454 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Displaying system on the LED monitor The LED monitor and operation monitor display the pulse count in the -9,999,999 pulses to +9,999,999 pulses range. To display it, the 4-digit LED monitor shows alternately the upper and lower four digits for one second and three seconds, respectively.
  • Page 455 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) Table 5.3-12 Status name/number and description in the positioning control function Positioning Status Status control function name Description status Positioning STOP “S/R” is OFF. control function The status changes to “WAIT = 1” when waiting for the run command stopped with “S/R”...
  • Page 456 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Serial pulse receiving function When the “S/R” function is assigned to X terminal and the serial pulse receiving setting is enabled, you can set the stop position (E point) with pulse input from the host equipment. The pulse count that has been calculated is applied to the stop position (J81, J82).
  • Page 457 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) When switching to the serial pulse receiving mode with the “SPRM” terminal, set the following dead times since the input type changes. Table 5.3-14 Input specifications when switching modes with “SPRM” When “SPRM”...
  • Page 458 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) J97 to J99 Servo lock (Gain, Completion timer, Completion range) ■ Servo lock This function holds the motor within the positioning completion range specified by J99 for the period specified by J98 even if an external force applies to the motor.
  • Page 459 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.9 J codes (Application Functions) ■ Specifying servo lock control Positioning complete signal “PSET” assignment (E20 to E21, E27: function code data = 82), servo lock (completion timer) (J98), servo lock (completion range) (J99) When the servo lock ends, and the motor is held in the range set at servo lock (completion range) (J99) for the length of time set at servo lock (completion timer) (J98), an ON signal is output as the in-position signal.

  • Page 460: J1 Codes (Application Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.10 J1 codes (Application Functions) 5.3.10 J1 codes (Application Functions) J105 PID control (Display unit) Units can be displayed when using the multi-function keypad (TP-A2SW). This function code selects the PID control display unit. When using PID control, data such as PID command values (SV), feedback values (PV), and control input (MV) can be monitored on the keypad.
  • Page 461 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.10 J1 codes (Application Functions) PID display coefficient and monitoring To monitor the PID command and its feedback value, set the scale to convert the values into easy-to-understand physical quantities such as temperature. The display unit cannot be used on the standard keypad. Use with the multi-function keypad (TP-A2SW).

  • Page 462: D Codes (Application Functions 2)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Chapter 5 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) [ 1 ] Speed control d01, A43, b43, r43 Speed control 1 to 4 (Speed command filter) d02, A44, b44, r44 (Speed detection filter) d03, A45, b45, r45 (P gain)
  • Page 463 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) P (Gain) Definition of “P gain = 1.0” is that the torque command is 100% (100% torque output of each inverter capacity) when the speed deviation (reference speed – detected speed) is 100% (equivalent to the maximum speed). If the maximum output frequency (F03/A0) setting is changed, the P gain = 1.0 definition will change, and therefore the setting value should be reviewed.
  • Page 464 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Output filter (d06/A48/b48/r48) This specifies the time constant for the primary delay filter for speed regulator output. Setting range: 0.000 to 0.100 (s) This is used when machine resonance such as hunting or vibrations cannot be suppressed by adjusting the P gain or integral time.
  • Page 465 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Speed control 1 to 4 (Notch filter resonance frequency) d07, A49, b49, r49 Speed control 1 to 4 (Notch filter attenuation level) d08, A50, b50, r50 Speed control 1 to 4 (Notch filter width) d29, A58, b58, r58 Reference function code: d25: ASR switching time These function codes specify speed control using notch filters.
  • Page 466 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) d09 to Speed control (JOG) (Speed command filter, Speed detection filter, P (Gain), I (Integral time), Output filter) Speed control (JOG) (FF gain), H147 These function codes are used to set up the speed control during jogging operation. The block diagrams and function codes related to jogging operation are the same as for normal operation.
  • Page 467 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ PG option Ch2 (Encoder pulse count) (d15) Set the encoder pulse count for speed feedback input. • Data setting range: h.0014 to h.EA60 (hexadecimal format) (20 to 60000 (P/R) when the above range is expressed in decimal format.) If using a dedicated Fuji motor for vector control, set to “0400 (1024 P/R).”...
  • Page 468 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) d21, d22 Speed agreement / PG error (Detection range, Detection timer) PG error selection Speed agreement signal “DSAG” (Function code E20 to E21, E27 (data = 71)) ■ Speed agreement / PG error (Detection range) (d21), (Detection timer) (d22) •...
  • Page 469 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Enabling an operation limiting function such as the torque limit and droop control will increase the deviation caused by a huge gap between the reference speed and detected one. In this case, the inverter may trip, interpreting this situation as a PG error, depending on the running state.
  • Page 470 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Application control selection d41 selects/deselects line speed control or master-follower operation (start at the same time, start after synchronization). Line speed control suppresses an increase in line speed resulting from the increasing radius of the take-up roll in a winder system.

  • Page 471: 2 ] Line Speed Control

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) [ 2 ] Line speed control Machinery configuration of winder system and function code settings Shown below is a machinery configuration of a winder system for which it is necessary to configure the function codes as listed below.
  • Page 472 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Setting with analog inputs To specify a line speed using analog inputs, set an analog input (0 to 100%) based on the following equation. p × b × 100 Analog input (%) = ×...
  • Page 473 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) d51 to d57 For adjustment by manufacturer These function codes are for adjustment by the manufacturer. Do not access these function codes. d59 to d63 PG option Ch1/Terminal [X] (Pulse string input) (Pulse input format, Encoder pulse count, Filter time constant, Pulse compensation coefficient 1, 2) (Refer to F01) These function codes apply to pulse string input for PG option card input terminals [XA] and [XB], or inverter control...

  • Page 474: 3 ] Master-Follower Operation

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) [ 3 ] Master-follower operation d71 to d78 Master-follower operation With master-follower operation, the speed and position of the master shaft being run by another inverter is detected with an encoder (PG), and the speed and position of the follower shaft being run by this inverter are synchronized. Depending on the synchronization method, there are 4 methods: “Speed synchronization (tuning) operation”...
  • Page 475 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Specifications of master-follower operation Item Specifications Remarks Speed control range 4P motor, 1:100 under V/f control with sensor When using 1024P/R encoder Control Speed control range 1:1500 Speed reduction ratio = 1:1 under vector control with sensor During running at constant speed...
  • Page 476 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Related function code list The following table shows a list of function codes used for master-follower operation. Function code list Function Permissible setting range Name Unit Remarks code * Lists only those which are related 0 to 12 F01, C30 Frequency setting 1, 2...
  • Page 477 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Master follower operation 0.00 to 1.50 Times (Main speed regulator gain) (APR P gain) 0.00 to 200.00 Times (APR output + side limiter) 20 to 200, 999: No limiter (APR output - side limiter) 20 to 200, 999: No limiter (Z phase alignment gain)
  • Page 478 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) F31, F61 Terminal [FM1], [FM2] (Function selection) By setting “17: Master-follower angle deviation” for F31 and F61, the master-follower angle deviation is output to analog output. An example when voltage output is set is shown in the following diagram. F29, 32 Terminal [FM1], [FM2] (Operation Voltage output...
  • Page 479 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) d59, d60 PG option Ch1/Terminal X (Pulse string input) d62, d63 (Pulse input format, Encoder pulse count, Pulse compensation coefficient 1, Pulse compensation coefficient 2) For settings related to command pulse input, refer to F01. PG option Ch1/Terminal X (Pulse string input) (Filter time constant) Set filter time constant for pulse string input.
  • Page 480 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Master-follower operation (APR output + side limiter) Master-follower operation (APR output + side limiter) These function codes specify the limits of APR output relative to the master motor speed. Specification of “999”...
  • Page 481 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Master-follower operation (Synchronization completion detection angle) d77 specifies the synchronization completion detection angle. If the absolute value of the phase angle deviation (position deviation) between the master and follower PGs becomes equal to or below the synchronization completion detection angle specified by d77, the inverter issues a synchronization completed signal “SY,”...
  • Page 482 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Checking the encoder connection method and rotation direction Before beginning master-follower operation, be sure to check the machine system travel direction and run command direction for both the master side and follower side, the motor rotation direction, and the rotation direction with encoder pulses.
  • Page 483 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Master side inverter Forward rotation (FWD) Reverse rotation (REV) Run command when FWD-CM shorted when REV-CM shorted Inverter Connection Connection Connection Connection Connection with motor in UVW not in UVW in UVW not in UVW phase order...
  • Page 484 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) If the master side and follower side encoder detection rotation direction differs from that of the follower side motor rotation direction, re-wire correctly, taking the following wiring example into consideration. When d41 = 0, 2, there is no need for Z-phase wiring.
  • Page 485 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) (*) With this machine configuration, only if d41 = 2 (Enable synchronous operation (start at the same time (without Z-phase)), master-follower conveyor operation can be performed in forward direction by setting the run command for the follower side to reverse rotation (REV) without “connecting as is.”...
  • Page 486 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Reduction ratio setting With master-follower operation, it is necessary to set the reduction ratio appropriately for the motor-machine system and encoder-machine system based on the system configuration. Synchronization Speed synchronization Position synchronization •...
  • Page 487 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Checking the encoder pulse count Before beginning master-follower operation, be sure to check the encoder pulse count for both the master side and follower side. If the encoder pulse count is not correctly detected, it will not be possible to perform operation correctly when performing master-follower operation.

  • Page 488: Encoder Connection

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Speed synchronization With speed synchronization, master-follower operation is performed in such a way as to keep the difference in speed between the master side and follower side to 0. The follower side speed is controlled to ensure that the deviation between the master side pulse frequency and follower side pulse frequency is 0, but phase difference synchronization is not performed.
  • Page 489 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Settings for speed synchronization Function codes Setting Remarks Frequency setting 1 Pulse string input V/f control with sensor Control method selection 1 Dynamic torque vector control with sensor Number of motor poles Sets the number of poles for the follower side motor.
  • Page 490 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Immediate synchronization (start at the same time) operation With immediate synchronization (start at the same time) operation (d41 = 2, 4), master-follower operation is performed in such a way as to maintain the phase difference between the master side and follower side the moment operation is changed from independent operation to master-follower operation.
  • Page 491 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Start after synchronization operation Start after synchronization operation (d41 = 3) involves control which ensures that each Z-phase matches based on the initially detected master side and follower side Z-phase (position) after operation starts. At this time, the follower side is delayed by a maximum of 1 rotation when starting up (Start after synchronization operation).

  • Page 492: Setting Example

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Setting example Setting example for master-follower operation without Z-phase compensation (d41 = 2) -(1)- Master side conveyor Follower side conveyor (forward direction) (forward direction) Reduction ratio Follower side motor Reduction ratio Reduction ratio Master side...
  • Page 493 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Setting example for master-follower operation without Z-phase compensation (d41 = 2) -(2)- Follower side conveyor Master side conveyor (forward direction) (forward direction) Reduction ratio Follower side motor Reduction ratio Reduction ratio Master side Reduction...
  • Page 494 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Setting example for master-follower operation with Z-phase compensation (d41 = 3, 4) -(1)- Follower side conveyor Master side conveyor (forward direction) (forward direction) Radius Radius =150 Follower side motor Radius = 40 Radius...
  • Page 495 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Rotational direction Master side PG Follower side PG Follower side run command Master side motor Rotational Rotational Forward rotation Reverse rotation rotation direction direction direction command (FWD) command (REV) Forward rotation (FWD) Forward Forward...
  • Page 496 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Setting example for master-follower operation with Z-phase compensation (d41 = 3, 4） -(2)- Master side conveyor Follower side conveyor (forward direction) (forward direction) Reduction ratio Follower side motor Reduction ratio Reduction ratio Master side Reduction...
  • Page 497 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Control block diagrams ＋ ＋ － ＋ － ＋ Vector control with speed sensor ＋ ＋ FUNCTION CODES F Codes － E Codes ＋ C Codes P Codes H Codes A Codes b Codes r Codes...
  • Page 498 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ＋ ＋ ＋ － － ＋ Vector control with speed sensor ＋ ＋ ＋ ＋ － ＋ ＋ ＋ Synchronous operation (with Z phase) control block diagram (d41=3 or 4) 5-318...
  • Page 499 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Master-follower operation monitoring The master-follower operation target position, current position, and current deviation (in angle units or pulse units) can be monitored from the keypad. Furthermore, the master-follower operation current control status can be monitored.
  • Page 500 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Master-follower operation status With master-follower operation, the running status can be monitored. The following diagram and table show a status example. Follower side 追従側 output frequency 出力周波数 [Hz] [Hz] Time 時間...
  • Page 501 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Alarm protective function If the inverter protective function is triggered and an alarm occurs, an alarm code appears on the keypad LED monitor, and inverter output is shut off. As a result, the motor will coast to a stop. Alarms relating to this option are shown in the following "List of option related alarms.”...
  • Page 502 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) ■ Unavailable function codes During master-follower operation, the following functions are not available. Frequency limiter (Lower limit) C01 to C04 Jump frequency Selecting “Vector control with sensor” (F42 = 6) disables the settings of the following functions during master- follower operation, as well as making the above functions unavailable.
  • Page 503 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.11 d codes (Application Functions 2) Motor 1 (PMSM magnetic pole position pull-in frequency) Related function code: P30 Motor 1 (PMSMs magnetic pole position detection method selection) Under vector control with sensor for PMSMs, if using an encoder with A/B-phase and Z-phase output, the magnetic pole position will be unknown immediately after turning ON the power, and therefore magnetic pole position pull-in operation is performed at the frequency set at d80 until the Z-phase is detected.

  • Page 504: D1 Codes (Applied Functions 2)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.12 d1 codes (Applied functions 2) 5.3.12 d1 codes (Applied functions 2) d120 to For brake signal reverse rotation d125 (Discharge current, Discharge frequency/speed, Discharge timer, Discharge torque, ON frequency/speed, ON timer) These codes are described in detail in the J68 section. d132，...

  • Page 505: D2 Codes (Applied Functions 2)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) [ 1 ] Orientation d204 to d299 Orientation ■ Orientation The orientation function can be used. Orientation can be performed with speed control during operation or while stopped. Orientation cannot be performed when using PMSMs.
  • Page 506 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) Performing orientation while the motor is stopped When positioning with orientation is complete, if under vector control with sensor, the servo lock is applied, and digital output “PSET” is output if the position deviation is within in-position range d239. If the positioning position is changed, “POS-SET”...
  • Page 507 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) Function Name Permissible setting range Unit Remarks code From Terminal [X1] to [X5] function 78 (1078): Select speed control parameters 1 “MPRM1” Terminal [FWD] (Function selection) E05, 79 (1079): Select speed control parameters 2 Terminal [REV] (Function selection) E98, “MPRM2”...
  • Page 508 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) Function Name Permissible setting range Unit Remarks code d240 Preset position - 4 higher order digits -9999 to +9999 d241 Preset position - 4 lower order digits 0 to 9999 d242 Homing shift value - 4 higher order digits 0 to 9999...
  • Page 509 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) ■ d204 Position regulator gain ■ d03, A45, b45, r45 Speed control P (Gain) ■ d04, A46, b46, r46 Speed control (Integral time) The position control responsiveness during deceleration and while the motor is stopped can be changed for the orientation operation.
  • Page 510 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) ■ d215 Homing/Orientation deceleration time Sets the deceleration time from orientation speed d213. Adjust this time if there is any overshoot or swing back relative to the specified position, allowing the settling time to be adjusted. Machine shaft 機械軸速度...
  • Page 511 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.13 d2 codes (Applied functions 2) ■ d277 Positioning data communication command selection If wishing to perform positioning using positioning data (S20, S21) from communication to perform orientation, set d277 to 1 in the same way as with position control to enable positioning commands from communication. ■...

  • Page 512: U Codes (Customizable Logic)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Chapter 5 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic or operation circuit for digital/analog input/output signals, customize those signals as desired, and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter.
  • Page 513 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) If you use the customizable logic cancellation command and customizable logic timer cancellation command, the inverter can unintentionally start because the speed command is unmasked, depending on the structure of the customizable logic.
  • Page 514 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Block diagram [E3S] Analog output Analog input (Terminal [FM]) [Terminal [12], Internal input signal Internal output signal [C1] , [V2]) (Analog) (Analog) Auxi lia ry freq uen cy se ttin g 1 Output fre que ncy 1 C1(C1) Auxi lia ry freq uen cy se ttin g 2...
  • Page 515 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) [E3N] Analog output Analog input [Terminal (Terminal Internal input signal Internal output signal [12], [C1], [FM]) [V2]) (Analog) (Analog) A uxil iary frequency set ting 1 Out put f requency 1 C1(C1) A uxil iary frequency set ting 2...
  • Page 516 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Customizable logic (Operation selection) U01 to U70 Customizable logic: Step 1 to 14 (Block selection, Input 1/2, Function 1/2) U71 to U80 Customizable logic: Output signal 1 to 10 (Output selection) U81 to U90 Customizable logic: Output signal 1 to 10 (Function selection) Customizable logic: Timer monitor (Step selection)
  • Page 517 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) The function code settings for each step are as follows: • Steps 1 to 14 Output Note) Step No. Block selection Input 1 Input 2 Function 1 Function 2 Step 1...
  • Page 518 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) [Input: digital] Block function code setting ■ Block selection (U01 etc.) The following items are available as logic circuits (with a general-purpose timer). Select the timer type with the units, and the logic circuit with the tens and the hundreds.
  • Page 519 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Data Logic circuit Description 80，82，83 Falling edge detector + Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output, plus general- general-purpose timer purpose timer. This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 1 ms (*1).
  • Page 520 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) The block diagrams for individual functions are given below. (Data=1□) Through output (Data=2□) Logical AND (Data=3□) Logical OR General-purpose timer Input 1 Output Input 2 (Data=4□) Logical XOR (Data=5□) Set priority flip-flop Previous...
  • Page 521 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) (Data=130) Timer with reset input ON Timer Input 1 Output Reset Input 2 (Data=14□) D flip-flop (Data=15□) T flip-flop General-purpose timer Flip-flop Input 1 Output Input 2 U05: Output initial status...
  • Page 522 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Operation of general-purpose timer The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below. (End 1) On-delay timer (End 2) Off-delay timer Input Output Timer Time setting value (End 3) Pulse (One-shot)
  • Page 523 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Inputs 1 and 2 (U02, U03, etc.) The following digital signals are available as input signals. Value in ( ) is in negative logic. Data Selectable signals 0000（1000）...
  • Page 524 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Data Selectable signals 4083（5083） Key input STOP "KP-STOP" 4084（5084） Key input UP "KP-UP" 4085（5085） Key input DOWN "KP-DOWN" 4088（5088） Key input SHIFT "KP-SHIFT" 4091（5091） Key input RESET "KP-RESET"...
  • Page 525 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) [Input: analog] Block function code setting ■ Block selection, function 1, function 2 (U01, U04, U05, etc.) (Analog) The following items are available as operation circuits. If the upper and lower limit values are the same, they will be limited in the -9990 to 9990 range.
  • Page 526 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block Operation Function 1 Function 2 selection Description circuit (U04 etc.) (U05 etc.) (U01 etc.) 2011 Limiter 2 Applies an upper/lower limiter for both positive and Upper limit Lower limit negative values to inverter input 1.
  • Page 527 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block Operation Function 1 Function 2 selection Description circuit (U04 etc.) (U05 etc.) (U01 etc.) 2057 Comparator 7 Subtracts input 2 from input 1, and ON is output if Deviation Hysteresis greater than the deviation set with function 1, and OFF...
  • Page 528 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block Operation Function 1 Function 2 selection Description circuit (U04 etc.) (U05 etc.) (U01 etc.) 2202 Scale Input 1 is transformed from the minimum and Maximum Minimum transformation...
  • Page 529 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) (2010) Remainder (2011) Limiter 2 (2013) Dead zone Remainder (2014) Fixed adder (2015) Fixed subtracter (2016) Fixed multiplier ＋ ＋ (2017) Fixed divider (2051) Comparator 1 (2052) Comparator 2 ON is prioritized when both conditions are satisfied.
  • Page 530 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) (2072) Window comparator 2 (2101) High selector (2102) Low selector Input 1 output Input 1 output Input 1 when Input 1 ≥ Input 2 when Input 1 ≤...
  • Page 531 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Function 1, Function 2 (U04, U05, etc.) Sets the upper limit and lower limit of operation circuit. Data Function Description Threshold value Hysteresis width Setting values for the operation circuit (selected -9990.00 to 0.00 to Upper limit, Lower limit...
  • Page 532 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 4003 When input 2 (digital input) is Function 1: Setting “1,”...
  • Page 533 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 4008 When input 2 (digital input) is Function 1: None “0,”...
  • Page 534 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 4012 When input 2 (digital input) is “0,” the ON time is added when Totalizer input 1 (digital input) is ON, or the OFF time is subtracted when...
  • Page 535 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 5000 When the step output signal Function 1: Step (SOXX) specified with function 1 number Selector 3 Output...
  • Page 536 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 6003 Specific function code (see separate table) values in the memory Function 1: Function are selected between the input 1 value and input 2 value with the code type 0 to 255...
  • Page 537 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 6005 Output the U1 function code data selected in input 1 (analog input). Function 1: U1 function code number Reading from the...
  • Page 538 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Block selection Function 1, Function Description Block diagram (U01 etc.) 2 (U04, U05, etc.) 6011 By specifying the appropriate bit in the function code belonging to Function 1: Function the S group, that condition is output as logic.
  • Page 539 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Output signal Each customizable logic step is output to SO01 to SO260. SO01 to SO260 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination, as listed below. To relay those outputs to any function other than the customizable logic, route them via customizable logic outputs CL01 to CLO14.
  • Page 540 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Function Name Data setting range Remarks Code Customizable logic output Disable signal 1 (Output selection) Output of step 1, “SO01” Output of step 2, “SO02” Customizable logic output signal 2 (Output selection) 259:...
  • Page 541 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Function Name Data setting range Remarks Code ■ If a step output is digital Customizable logic output signal 1 (Function selection) The same value as E98 can be specified. 0 (1000): Select multistep frequency (0 to 1 steps) “SS1”...
  • Page 542 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Specific function codes The following function codes can be changed in memory by using the customizable logic “Temporary rewriting of function codes (6003).” Overwritten values are cleared with power OFF. •...
  • Page 543 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Name Name Name For special adjustment (Torque Brake control signal H131 Speed control 3 (P gain) limiting) (Brake-apply frequency/speed) For special adjustment (Anti- Brake control signal (Brake-apply H133 Speed control 3 (I integral time) regenerative control)
  • Page 544 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Name Name Name Master-follower operation (Main speed Magnetic flux level during d204 Position regulator gain regulator gain) deceleration Master-follower operation (APR P Magnetic flux level during d208 Orientation mode selection gain)

  • Page 545: Operating Precautions

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Task process cycle setting (U100) U100 data Content Automatically adjusts the task cycle from 2 ms to 20 ms depending on the number of used steps.
  • Page 546 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Customizable logic timer monitor (Step selection) (U91, X89 to X93) The monitor function codes can be used to monitor the I/O status or timer’s operation state in the customized logics. Selection of monitor timer Function codes Function...
  • Page 547 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Customizable logic output monitor (Step selection) (U98) ■ Customizable logic output monitor (Display unit selection) (U99) The output status of the desired customizable logic steps can be monitored on the keypad. This is enabled by setting “32: Customizable logic output”...
  • Page 548 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) U101 to U106 Customizable logic (Conversion operation 1 (X1, Y1), Conversion operation 2 (X2, Y2), U107 Conversion operation 3 (X3, Y3)) Customizable logic (Automatic conversion coefficient calculation) Operation coefficient KA, KB, and KC used with Block 3001: Conversion 1 calculation formula (KA x input 1 + KB x input 1 + KC) is calculated automatically.
  • Page 549 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) ■ Setting examples of customizable logic Setting example 1: Use one switch to change multiple signals If you use one switch to change the frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 and torque limit 2/torque limit 1 simultaneously, replace an external circuit that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic reducing the digital input terminals used to a single terminal.
  • Page 550 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Setting example 2: Consolidating multiple output signals into one If also outputting a momentary power failure restart “IPF” signal to an Inverter running “RUN” signal, replace an external circuit that is conventionally needed with a customizable logic sequence to reduce the digital output terminals and external relays.
  • Page 551 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.14 U codes (Customizable Logic) / 5.3.15 U1 codes (Customizable Logic) Setting example 3: One-shot operation If starting operation by shorting the SW-FWD switch or SW-REV switch, or stopping operation by shorting the SW- STOP switch (same as multi-function keypad key / key), the previously required external circuit can be replaced with customizable logic.

  • Page 552: Y Codes (Link Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) y01 to y20 RS-485 communication 1, RS-485 communication 2 In the RS-485 communication, two systems can be connected. System (Communication port) Connection configuration Function codes Equipment that can be connected (1) Keypad (standard/multi- function)
  • Page 553 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) ■ Operation selection when error occurs (y02, y12) Selects the operation when an error occurs during RS-485 communication. RS-485 errors are logical errors such as address errors, parity errors and framing errors, as well as transmission errors and disconnection errors set with y08/y18.
  • Page 554 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) ■ Stop bit selection (y07, y17) Sets the stop bit. y07, y17 data Function • For Modbus RTU: 2 bits The value does not need to be set since it is automatically determined in conjunction with the parity bit.
  • Page 555 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) y60, y61 ， BACnet MS/TP device instance (high order digits, low order digits) These function codes set the device instance used for identification at the BACnet MS/TP protocol application layer. The setting method differs as follows depending on the y16 setting value.
  • Page 556 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) RTU current format switching It is possible to switch the format of the current data which can be monitored by Modbus RTU protocol with RS-485 communication. If switching from the E1 or E2 series, and inheriting the customer’s controller program (using without changes), set “1: Format 19.”...
  • Page 557 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) Link function (X terminal operation selection) Related function codes y98: Bus function (Operation selection) H30: Link function (Operation selection) When running and operating the inverter via field bus communication, this function is used if issuing run commands only with inverter unit digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV].
  • Page 558 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) Data clear processing for communications error If any of the communication error alarms (Er8，ErP，Er4，Er5) occurs in RS-485, or bus option, the data of communication command function codes (S codes) can automatically be cleared. Since the frequency and operation commands are also disabled when the data is cleared, the inverter does not start unintentionally when an alarm is released.
  • Page 559 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) Communication compatibility mode (E1, E2 compatibility mode) When reading or writing inverter function code setting data via RS-485 communication or field bus communication, it is possible to select a compatibility mode that permits communication with the same function code and data format as the FRENIC-Multi (E1) and FRENIC-Ace (E2) series.
  • Page 560 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) E2S function codes → E3S replace destination function codes Replace Replace-enabled E1 function codes destination E3 conditions function codes Code Name Code Function code Replaced conditions Remarks ○: Yes ―: No E39 Constant feed time coefficient [45] y96=7...
  • Page 561 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.16 y codes (Link Functions) Communication data storage selection The inverter memory (non-volatile memory) has a limited number of rewritable times (100 thousand to 1 million times). If the count immoderately increases, the data cannot be modified or saved, causing a memory error. If frequently rewriting data through communication, data can be stored to the temporary memory instead of writing it to the nonvolatile memory.

  • Page 562: O/O1/O2 Codes (Option Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.17 o/o1/o2 codes (Option Functions) 5.3.17 o/o1/o2 codes (Option Functions) [E3S] These codes are set when the inverter is equipped with an option card. Set the codes after referring to the description in Chapter 11 “11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview”, ”11.13 Terminal Block Type Options”...

  • Page 563: K Codes (Keypad Functions)

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) The multi-function keypad indicated in the description refers to the TP-A2SW.  For details on the multi-function keypad installation method, separately sold battery/SD card insertion and removal method, screen display and operation methods, and setting method for setting items other than K codes, refer to the TP-A2SW multi-function keypad Instruction Manual (Detailed version) (INR-SI47-2422□- LCD monitor (Language selection)

  • Page 564: Status Display

    5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) Status display The status message displayed on the multi-function keypad LCD can be hidden or displayed. • Data setting range: 0, 1 K08 data Function Hide Show all Status message Displays operating statuses that the operator needs to be notified of.
  • Page 565 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) Sub-monitor 1 display content Sub-monitor 2 display content Bar graph 1 display content Bar graph 2 display content Bar graph 3 display content The displayed content can be selected from the following function codes based on the display type selected with K15.
  • Page 566 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) Traceback (CH4 operation selection) K54 to K57 Traceback (Analog Ch1 to 4 source selection) K58 to K65 Traceback (Digital Ch1 to 8 source selection) By selecting the analog input/output signal or digital input/output signal to be saved when an event occurs using the FRENIC-Loader4 inverter support software and setting it to the inverter, setting information is saved to this function code.
  • Page 567 5.3 Description of Function Codes 5.3.18 K codes (Keypad Functions) Multi-function keypad TP-A2SW key shortcut selection Multi-function keypad TP-A2SW key shortcut selection By pressing the multi-function keypad TP-A2SW (option) keys while in Running mode, it is possible to jump to the Programming mode (PRG) menu screen set beforehand. •...
  • Page 569 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or an alarm or a warning occurs. Contents Protective Functions ······························································································· 6-1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ····································································· 6-3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor ····························································· 6-4 6.3.1 Alarm code list ·······························································································...
  • Page 570 [ 28 ] 0H3 Inverter internal overheat ········································································· 6-21 [ 29 ] 0H4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor) ······························································ 6-22 [ 30 ] 0H6 Charging resistor overheat ······································································· 6-22 [ 31 ] 0ln Motor overloads 1 to 2 ············································································ 6-23 [ 32 ] 0lU Inverter overload ····················································································...

  • Page 571: Protective Functions

    6.1 Protective Function Protective Functions In order to prevent the system going down and to shorten recovery time, FRENIC-Ace is equipped with various protective functions shown in Table 6.1-1 below. The protective functions marked with an asterisk (*) in the table are disabled by factory default. Enable them according to your needs.
  • Page 572 6.1 Protective Functions Related Protective Function Description function Code Upon receipt of the forced stop signal “STOP,” this function interrupts the run Forced stop* command and other functions currently applied in order to forcedly decelerate the inverter to a stop. This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage between main circuit Surge protection －...

  • Page 573: Before Proceeding With Troubleshooting

    6.5.2 [ 5 ] Display of parenthesis [ ] 6.5.2 [ 6 ] Function code data cannot be changed 6.5.2 [ 7 ] Function code data cannot be changed (changed from link functions) If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.

  • Page 574: If An Alarm Code Appears On The Led Monitor

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6.3.1 Alarm code list When an alarm is detected, check the alarm code displayed on the keypad 7-segment LED. With the Ethernet built-in type (E3N), the alarm code is displayed 2 digits at a time alternately (ex.
  • Page 575 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor Table 6.3-1 cont’d Alarm Warning selection Alarm Reference Alarm code name Retry Alarm subcode name code possible subcode page Abnormal tuning results due to interphase voltage 1 to 4 unbalance, output phase loss, etc.
  • Page 576 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor Table 6.3-1 cont’d Warning Alarm Alarm Reference Alarm code name selection Retry Alarm subcode name code subcode page possible Occurrence of low voltage during gate ON (F14=0) Run command ON during low voltage (F14=0, 2) Undervoltage －...

  • Page 577: Alarm Causes, Checks And Measures

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6.3.2 Alarm causes, checks and measures [ 1 ] Ca1 to Ca5 User-defined alarm Phenomenon An alarm defined with customizable logic occurred. Possible Cause Check and Measures An error is displayed if the alarm Check the input/output status in accordance with the alarm conditions conditions defined by the user with set with customizable logic.

  • Page 578: 4 ] Dbh Braking Resistor Overheat

    OFF and ON again. (3) A failure (single failure) of If the alarm is not released by the procedures above, the inverter is out enable circuit (safety stop of order. circuit) was detected. ➔ Contact your Fuji Electric representative.

  • Page 579: 6 ] Ecl Customizable Logic Failure

    ➔ The PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective. Contact your Fuji Electric representative. (4) The power was cut and the Save the user setting values with function code H193, and confirm...

  • Page 580: 8 ] Er2 Keypad Communication Error

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 8 ] er2 Keypad communication error Phenomenon A communication error occurred between the keypad and the inverter. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Broken communication cable or Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections. poor contact.

  • Page 581: 10 ] Er4 Option Communication Error

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 10 ] er4 Option communication error Phenomenon A communication error occurred between the option card and the inverter. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) There was a problem with the Check whether the connector on the option card is properly engaged connection between the option with that of the inverter.

  • Page 582: 13 ] Er7 Tuning Error

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 13 ] er7 Tuning error Phenomenon Auto-tuning failed. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Motor is not wired correctly ➔ Check whether the motor wiring is causing a phase interruption, and wire all 3 phases correctly.

  • Page 583: 14 ] Er8 Rs-485 Communication Error (Communication Port 1)/ Erp Rs-485 Communication Error (Communication Port 2)

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 14 ] er8 RS-485 communication error (Communication port 1)/ erp RS-485 communication error (Communication port 2) Phenomenon A communication error occurred during RS-485 communication. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Communication conditions of Compare the settings of the function codes (y01 to y10, y11 to y20) with the inverter do not match that of...

  • Page 584: 15 ] Erd Step-Out Detection/Detection Failure Of Magnetic Pole Position At Startup

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 15 ] erd Step-out detection/detection failure of magnetic pole position at startup Phenomenon PMSM (Permanent magnet synchronous motor) step-out was detected. The magnetic pole position at startup failed to be detected. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Function code settings do not...

  • Page 585: 16 ] Erc Magnetic Pole Position Detection Error

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 16 ] erC Magnetic pole position detection error Phenomenon When performing vector control with sensor (PMSM), an error occurred when performing PMSM magnetic pole position detection. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The inverter settings are not Check whether the motor being used, the existence and type of the appropriate.

  • Page 586: 17 ] Ere Speed Inconsistency/Excessive Speed Deviation

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 17 ] ere Speed inconsistency/excessive speed deviation Phenomenon An excessive deviation appears between the speed command and the detected speed. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Incorrect setting of function Check the motor “Number of poles”...

  • Page 587: 18 ] Erf Data Saving Error During Undervoltage

    Check and Measures (1) Control PCB and power supply It is necessary to replace the control PCB or power supply PCB. PCB combination abnormality ➔ Contact your Fuji Electric representative. [ 20 ] ero Positioning control error Phenomenon Excessive position deviation occurred on servo lock/master-follower operation/position control.

  • Page 588: 21 ] Err Simulated Failure

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 21 ] err Simulated failure Phenomenon The LED displays the alarm err. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Keep key + ➔ To escape from this alarm state, press the key.

  • Page 589: 24 ] Lu Undervoltage

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 24 ] lU Undervoltage Phenomenon DC intermediate circuit voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) A momentary power failure ➔ Clear the alarm. occurred.

  • Page 590: 25 ] 0Cn Instantaneous Overcurrent

    If overcurrent is displayed when the inverter is run with the wiring disconnected from the inverter output terminals [U], [V], and [W]): ➔ The inverter may be defective. Contact your Fuji Electric representative. (2) Ground faults have occurred Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals [U], [V], and [W]) and perform a on the inverter output lines.

  • Page 591: 26 ] 0H1 Cooling Fin Overheat

    6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 26 ] 0H1 Cooling fin overheat Phenomenon Temperature around the cooling fins has risen abnormally. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The surrounding temperature Measure the surrounding temperature. exceeded the inverter's ➔...
  • Page 592 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 29 ] 0H4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor) Phenomenon Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The temperature around the Measure the surrounding temperature. motor exceeded the motor's ➔...
  • Page 593 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 31 ] 0ln Motor overloads 1 to 2 Phenomenon Thermal overload protection function for motor overload detection of motors 1-2 is operating. Motor 1 overload Motor 2 overload Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The thermal protection Check the motor characteristics.
  • Page 594 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 32 ] 0lU Inverter overload Phenomenon Temperature inside the inverter has risen abnormally. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The surrounding temperature Measure the surrounding temperature. exceeded the inverter's ➔...
  • Page 595 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 33 ] 0pl Output phase loss detection Phenomenon Output phase loss occurred. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Inverter output wires are Measure the inverter output current. broken. ➔ Replace the output wires. (2) The motor winding is broken.
  • Page 596 If overvoltage is displayed when the inverter is run with the wiring disconnected from the inverter output terminals [U], [V], and [W]: ➔ The inverter may be defective. Contact your Fuji Electric representative. (7) Malfunction caused by noise. Check if the DC intermediate circuit voltage was below the overvoltage level when the overvoltage alarm occurred.
  • Page 597 Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The charging circuit is Inverter repair is necessary defective. ➔ Contact your Fuji Electric representative. [ 37 ] pG PG wire break Phenomenon The pulse generator (PG) wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit.
  • Page 598 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 39 ] Fod Forced operation (Fire Mode) Phenomenon Displayed in the alarm history when forced operation (Fire Mode) is performed. Operation continues without a trip occurring even if another alarm occurs during forced operation.
  • Page 599 6.4 If a Warning Code Appears on the LED Monitor If a Warning Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6.4.1 Warning code list It is possible to display a warning cause code while the inverter continues to run, and output a warning signal from the [Y] terminal.
  • Page 600 6.4 If a Warning Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6.4.2 Warning cause and check [ 1 ] CnT Machine life (Number of startups) Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Machine life (Number of This is displayed when the number of times that the motor is started startups) reaches the number of times set with function code H79 (maintenance setting startup count).
  • Page 601 6.4 If a Warning Code Appears on the LED Monitor [ 7 ] pTC PTC thermistor activate Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) Thermistor detection (PTC) This warning is displayed when the temperature detected with the motor PTC thermistor exceeds the operation level (H27) threshold value.
  • Page 602 6.5 Other Errors Other Errors 6.5.1 Abnormal motor operation [ 1 ] The motor does not rotate Possible Cause Check and Measures Check the input voltage, presence of interphase voltage unbalance, etc. (1) The main power supply is not being input correctly. ➔...
  • Page 603 6.5 Other Errors Possible Cause Check and Measures (7) The reference frequency was Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly by using below the starting or stop “I/O Checking” on the keypad menu. frequency. ➔ Set the reference frequency at the same or higher value than that of the starting (F23*) and stop (F25*) frequencies.

  • Page 604: The Motor Rotates, But The Speed Does Not Increase

    6.5 Other Errors [ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The specified maximum output Check the data of function code F03* (Maximum output frequency 1). frequency was too low. ➔...

  • Page 605: The Motor Runs In The Opposite Direction To The Command

    6.5 Other Errors Possible Cause Check and Measures (11) When performing vector Check whether the encoder wiring/rotation direction and motor control with sensor, the motor wiring/rotation direction match the function code settings. rotates slowly, and is unable ➔ Wire the encoder and motor correctly, and set the correct rotation to run at the specified speed.
  • Page 606 6.5 Other Errors [ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at constant speed Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The frequency setting is Check the signals for the frequency command with “I/O Checking” fluctuating. using the keypad menu.

  • Page 607: Unpleasant Noises Are Emitted From Motor Or Noises Fluctuate

    6.5 Other Errors [ 5 ] Unpleasant noises are emitted from motor or noises fluctuate Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The specified carrier frequency Check the data of Motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26) and Motor is too low. sound (Tone) (F27). ➔...
  • Page 608 6.5 Other Errors [ 6 ] The motor does not accelerate or decelerate according to set acceleration or deceleration times Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The inverter runs the motor with Check the data of function code H07 (Curvilinear acceleration/ S-curve or curvilinear deceleration).

  • Page 609: The Motor Does Not Run As Expected

    6.5 Other Errors [ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The data of function code F14 Check if an undervoltage trip lU occurs. is either “0,”...
  • Page 610 6.5 Other Errors [ 10 ] The motor stalls during acceleration Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) The acceleration time was too Check the data of acceleration time (F07, E10, E12, E14, H57, H58). short. ➔ Extend the acceleration time. (2) Moment of inertia of load is Measure the inverter output current.

  • Page 611: Problems With Inverter Settings

    6.5 Other Errors 6.5.2 Problems with inverter settings [ 1 ] Nothing appears on the keypad Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) No power (neither main power Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance. nor auxiliary control power) is ➔...
  • Page 612 6.5 Other Errors [ 3 ] Display of under bars (__ _ _) Phenomenon Although key ( / keys for the Multi-function keypad), run forward command “FWD”, or run reverse command “REV” was pressed, the motor did not rotate and under bars were displayed.
  • Page 613 6.5 Other Errors [ 6 ] Function code data cannot be changed Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) An attempt was made to Check if the inverter is running with “Drive Monitoring” using the keypad change function code data that menu, and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be cannot be changed when the changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code...
  • Page 614 6.5 Other Errors [ 8 ] __En appears Phenomenon Even when keys and “FWD”/”REV” signals are input, the motor did not rotate, and __En was displayed. Possible Cause Check and Measures (1) EN terminals are OFF. Check whether terminals [EN1] and [EN2] are ON. ➔...

  • Page 615: Maintenance And Inspection

    Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection items of the inverter. Contents Inspection Interval ·································································································· 7-1 Daily Inspection ····································································································· 7-2 Periodic Inspection ································································································· 7-3 7.3.1 Periodic inspection 1 (Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running)········· 7-3 7.3.2 Periodic inspection 2 (When the inverter is ON or it is running)··································...

  • Page 617: Inspection Interval

    Replacement of smoothing capacitors and close checks The 10-year inspection should be performed only by the persons who have finished the Fuji Electric training course. Contact the sales agent where you purchased the product or your nearest Fuji Electric representative. (Excl.

  • Page 618: Daily Inspection

    7.2 Daily Inspection Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is running or the power is ON. Table 7.2-1 lists daily inspection items. Table 7.2-1 Daily inspection list Inspection Inspection item(s) Inspection method...

  • Page 619: Periodic Inspection

    7.3 Periodic Inspection Periodic Inspection 7.3.1 Periodic inspection 1 (Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running) Perform periodic inspection 1 according to the items listed in Table 7.3-1 Periodic inspection list 1. When performing periodic inspection 1 after stopping the inverter, first shut down the power and then remove the front cover before performing the inspection.
  • Page 620 7.3 Periodic Inspection Inspection location Inspection item Inspection method Criteria 1) Are there any loose screws or 1) Retighten connectors? 2) Olfactory and 2) Are there any abnormal odors or visual inspection discoloration? 3), 4) Visual 3) Are there any cracks, damage, inspection 1), 2), 3), 4) There deformation, or significant rust?

  • Page 621: Periodic Inspection 2 (When The Inverter Is On Or It Is Running)

    7.3 Periodic Inspection 7.3.2 Periodic inspection 2 (When the inverter is ON or it is running) Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is running or the power is ON. Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7.3-2 Periodic inspection list 2.

  • Page 622: List Of Periodic Replacement Parts

    Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions. It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals indicated in Table 7.4- 1. When the replacement is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative. Table 7.4-1 Replacement parts...

  • Page 623: Judgment On Service Life

    7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts 7.4.1 Judgment on service life The inverter has a life prediction function for some parts which predicts the service life of those parts based on their usage, and judges whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life. The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the part life is influenced by the surrounding temperature and its usage environment.
  • Page 624 7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by “(1) Measurement of discharging time” or “(2) Main power supply ON time count.” (1) Measurement of discharging time • The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter’s internal load conditions, e.g., options installed or ON/OFF of digital I/O signals.
  • Page 625 7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts [ 1 ] Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with the initial value at the time of shipment The measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with the initial value at the time of shipment.

  • Page 626: Conditions

    7.4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts [ 2 ] Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions In order to measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF, set the measurement conditions and measure the reference capacitance (initial value) using the procedure below.

  • Page 627: Measuring The Amount Of Electricity In The Main Circuit

    7.5 Measuring the Amount of Electricity in the Main Circuit Measuring the Amount of Electricity in the Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the input (primary) circuit and output (secondary) circuit of the inverter’s main circuit contain harmonic components, the readings may vary with the type of the meter. Use meters indicated in Table 7.5-1 when measuring with instruments for commercial frequencies.

  • Page 628: Insulation Test

    If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit, observe the following instructions; otherwise, the inverter may be damaged. As with the Megger test, performing a withstand voltage test incorrectly may damage the product. When the withstand voltage test is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative. 7.6.1 Megger test of main circuit 1) Use a 500 VDC megohmmeter, and be sure to measure with the main power turned OFF.

  • Page 629: Product Inquiries And Warranty

    (ii) The failure was caused by some reason other than the purchased or delivered Fuji Electric product. (iii) The failure was unrelated to a Fuji Electric product, such as a problem with the design of the customer's equipment or software.

  • Page 630: 2 ] Exclusion Of Liability For Loss Of Opportunity, Etc

    As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the customer's request, Fuji Electric or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis for a fee. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with Fuji Electric's fee regulations.
  • Page 631 Chapter 8 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams of the control section. The main block diagrams of the control section are divided into 2 groups: the Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E), and the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). Contents Meanings of Symbols Used in the Control Block Diagrams ·············································...
  • Page 632 [ 1 ] Vector control : Common ················································································· 8-27 [ 2 ] Vector control : Torque command/ torque limit ······················································ 8-28 [ 3 ] Vector control : Speed control / torque control ······················································ 8-29 [ 4 ] Vector control : Induction motor speed control/torque control ··································· 8-30 [ 5 ] Vector control : Induction motor drive ··································································...

  • Page 633: Meanings Of Symbols Used In The Control Block Diagrams

    8.1 Meanings of Symbols Used in the Control Block Diagrams The high-performance, standard inverter FRENIC-Ace is provided with various functions that allow operations to meet the application requirements. For details of each function code, refer to Chapter 5 “FUNCTION CODES.” Function codes are mutually related and priority order is given depending on the function codes and data thereof.

  • Page 634: Basic Type/Emc Filter Built-In Type (E3S/E3E)

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.1 Frequency Setting Section Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.1 Frequency Setting Section Fig. 8.2-1 Frequency setting section block diagram...
  • Page 635 8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.1 Frequency Setting Section Terminal [12]*1 Auxiliary frequency setting 1 *100% = Maximum +100 % frequency Auxiliary frequency setting 2 1,2,15,16 Polarity selection Auxiliary frequency setting 3 -100 % Auxiliary frequency setting 4 ×...
  • Page 636 8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.1 Frequency Setting Section Fig. 8.2-3 Frequency setting section block diagram...

  • Page 637: Operation Command Section

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.2 Operation Command Section 8.2.2 Operation Command Section Priority to later writing Fig. 8.2-4 Operation command section block diagram...

  • Page 638: Pid Control Section (For Processing)

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.3 PID Control Section (for Processing) 8.2.3 PID Control Section (for Processing) Fig. 8.2-5 PID control section (for processing) block diagram...

  • Page 639: Pid Control Section (For Dancer)

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.4 PID Control Section (for Dancer) 8.2.4 PID Control Section (for Dancer) × Fig. 8.2-6 PID control section (for dancer) block diagram...

  • Page 640: V/F Control Section

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.5 V/f Control Section 8.2.5 V/f Control Section [ 1 ] V/f control : Common LED display 8888 26: Set frequency (before acc./dec. calculation) Acc./dec. time ratio setting F03/A01 Max. output frequency F04/A02 Base frequency F23/A21 Starting frequency...

  • Page 641: 2 ] V/F Control : Without Speed Feedback

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.5 V/f Control Section [ 2 ] V/f control : Without speed feedback Rectifying Power circuit Main circuit supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan Motor Cooling fan Detection of ON/OFF Gate drive circuit output currents control (lu, lv, lw) Cooling fan ON/...

  • Page 642: V/F Control : With Speed Feedback

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.5 V/f Control Section [ 3 ] V/f control : With speed feedback Pulse encode r Power Rectifying circuit (Pu lse gen erator) Main ci rcu it supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan Motor Cooling fan Detection of ON/OFF...

  • Page 643: Vector Control : Common

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 1 ] Vector control : Common Acc./dec. time ratio setting LED display F03/A01 Max. output frequency 8888 F04/A02 Base frequency 26: Set frequency (before acc./dec. calculation) F23/A21 Starting frequency F24/A62...

  • Page 644: Vector Control : Torque Command/ Torque Limit

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 2 ] Vector control : Torque command/ torque limit Multifnctional Select local keypad (keypad) command "LOC" Select link Remote/Local operation "LE" decision RS-485 communication port 1 Connector for connecting keypad Analog torque command Host...

  • Page 645: Vector Control : Speed Control / Torque Control

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 3 ] Vector control : Speed control / torque control Speed limit value Analog speed limit value selector Speed limit start/ Speed limiting "S-LIM" stop decision Speed limit Auto speed Compensation torque for Analog speed limit (FWD)

  • Page 646: Vector Control : Induction Motor Speed Control/Torque Control

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 4 ] Vector control : Induction motor speed control/torque control Ready JOG forward Speed agreement/PG error (hysteresis width) Speed control 1 to 4 (speed Servo lock rotation "FJOG" command filter) Speed agreement/PG error (detection timer) (gain)

  • Page 647: 5 ] Vector Control : Induction Motor Drive

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 5 ] Vector control : Induction motor drive Pulse encoder Motor Power (Pulse generator) Rectifying circuit Main circuit supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan thermistor Cooling fan Detection of ON/OFF Gate drive circuit output currents...

  • Page 648: Vector Control : Synchronous Motor Speed Control/Torque Control

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 6 ] Vector control : Synchronous motor speed control/torque control Speed agreement/PG error (hysteresis width) Servo lock Speed agreement/PG error (detection timer) (gain) Speed control 1 to 4 PG error processing (Completion range) (speed command filter)

  • Page 649: 7 ] Vector Control : Pmsm Drive

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 7 ] Vector control : PMSM drive PM motor Pulse encoder Power Rectifying circuit (Pulse generator) Main circuit supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan thermistor Detection of Cooling fan ON/ Gate drive circuit output currents OFF control...

  • Page 650: Fm Output Section

    8.2 Basic type/EMC filter built-in type (E3S/E3E) 8.2.7 FM Output Section 8.2.7 FM Output Section Terminal function selection Output frequency 1 Operation Output gain Bias selection Filter Output frequency 2 Output current Hardware switch =0:0～10 V Output voltage SW5 = FMV side Voltage Output torque ×...

  • Page 651: Ethernet Built-In Type (E3N)

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.1 Frequency Setting Section Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.1 Frequency Setting Section Fig. 8.3-1 Frequency setting section block diagram 8-19...
  • Page 652 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.1 Frequency Setting Section Terminal [12]*1 Auxiliar y fr equen cy setti ng 1 *100% = Maximum +100 % frequency 1,2,15,16 Auxiliar y fr equen cy setti ng 2 Polarity selection Auxiliar y fr equen cy setti ng 3 -100 % Auxiliar y fr equen cy setti ng 4 ×...
  • Page 653 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.1 Frequency Setting Section Fig. 8.3-3 Frequency setting section block diagram 8-21...

  • Page 654: Operation Command Section

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.2 Operation Command Section 8.3.2 Operation Command Section Priority to later writing Fig. 8.3-4 Operation command section block diagram 8-22...

  • Page 655: Pid Control Section (For Processing)

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.3 PID Control Section (for Processing) 8.3.3 PID Control Section (for Processing) Fig. 8.3-5 PID control section (for processing) block diagram 8-23...

  • Page 656: Pid Control Section (For Dancer)

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.4 PID Control Section (for Dancer) 8.3.4 PID Control Section (for Dancer) × Fig. 8.3-6 PID control section (for dancer) block diagram 8-24...

  • Page 657: V/F Control Section

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.5 V/f Control Section 8.3.5 V/f Control Section [ 1 ] V/f control : Common 26: Set frequency (before acc./dec. calculation) Acc./dec. time ratio setting F03/A01 Max. output frequency F04/A02 Base frequency F23/A21 Starting frequency Acc./dec.

  • Page 658: V/F Control : Without Speed Feedback

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.5 V/f Control Section [ 2 ] V/f control : Without speed feedback Power Rectifying circuit supply Main circuit capacitor 3～ Cooling fan Motor Cooling fan ON/OFF Detection of Gate drive circuit output currents control (lu, lv, lw) Cooling fan ON/ PWM signals...

  • Page 659: Control Section (Vector Control)

    8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 1 ] Vector control : Common Acc./dec. time ratio setting F03/A01 Max. output frequency F04/A02 Base frequency 26: Set frequency (before acc./dec. calculation) F23/A21 Starting frequency Acc./dec.
  • Page 660 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 2 ] Vector control : Torque command/ torque limit Select link operation "LE" Analog torque command Torque command value Set torque function Support link command via function Ethernet communication Port 1/2 communication RJ-45 connector for Ethernet connect ion Host...
  • Page 661 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 3 ] Vector control : Speed control / torque control Speed limit value Analog speed limit value selector Speed limit start/ Speed limiting "S-LIM" stop decision Speed limit Auto speed Compensation torque for Analog speed limit (FWD) speed limit...
  • Page 662 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 4 ] Vector control : Induction motor speed control/torque control Speed agreement/PG error (hysteresis width) Speed control 1 to 4 JOG forward (speed command filter) Speed agreement/PG error (detection timer) Ready for jogging rotation "FJOG"...
  • Page 663 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 5 ] Vector control : Induction motor drive Motor Power Rectifying circuit Main circuit supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan thermistor Cooling fan Detection of ON/OFF Gate drive circuit output currents control (lu, lv, lw) Cooling fan ON/...
  • Page 664 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 6 ] Vector control : Synchronous motor speed control/torque control Speed agreement/PG error (hysteresis width) Speed agreement/PG error (detection timer) PG error processing Speed control 1 to 4 (speed command filter) Alarm 0: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)
  • Page 665 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.6 Control Section (Vector control) [ 7 ] Vector control : PMSM drive PM motor Power Rectifying circuit Main circuit supply capacitor 3～ Cooling fan thermistor Cooling fan Detection of ON/OFF Gate drive circuit output currents control (lu, lv, lw) Cooling fan ON/...
  • Page 666 8.3 Ethernet built-in type (E3N) 8.3.7 FM Output Section 8.3.7 FM Output Section Terminal function selection Output frequency 1 Operation selection Output gain Bias Filter Output frequency 2 Output current Hardware switch =0:0～10 V Output voltage SW5 = FMV side Voltage Output torque ×...
  • Page 667 Chapter 9 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS-485 and Ethernet communications. For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual. For details of Ethernet communication, refer to “9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview.” Contents Overview of RS-485 Communication ··········································································...
  • Page 668 [ 2 ] PROFINET IO ······························································································· 9-49 [ 3 ] Modbus TCP ································································································· 9-64 9.3.6 Specifications (Ethernet) ·················································································· 9-73 [ 1 ] Ethernet specifications ···················································································· 9-73 [ 2 ] Ethernet/IP specifications················································································· 9-74 [ 3 ] PROFINET IO specifications ············································································ 9-75 [ 4 ] Modbus TCP specifications ··············································································...

  • Page 669: Overview Of Rs-485 Communication

    485 communication port 2 by default. The protocols for controlling inverters support the Modbus RTU protocol and BACnet MS/TP that is widely used, and Fuji Electric’s general-purpose inverter protocol that is common to Fuji Electric’s inverters including conventional series. • Connecting the keypad to the COM port 1 automatically switches to the keypad protocol; there is no need to modify the function code setting.

  • Page 670: Rs-485 Common Specifications

    9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication 9.1.1 RS-485 common specifications Table 9.1-1 Item Specification Protocol FGI-BUS Modbus RTU BACnet MS/TP Compliance Fuji general-purpose Modicon Modbus RTU- ASHRAE/ANSI/ISO inverter protocol compliant -compliant (only in RTU mode) Connection quantity Host device: 1, Inverters: Up to 31 Electrical mode EIA RS-485 Connection to RS-485...

  • Page 671: Terminal Specifications

    9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication 9.1.2 Terminal specifications [ 1 ] RS-485 communication port 1 (for connecting the keypad) Connect the keypad port using the keypad relay adapter CBAD-CP. The pin assignment for the CBAD-CP’s RJ-45 connector is as follows in Table 9.1-2. Table 9.1-2 Signal name Description...

  • Page 672: Connection Method

    Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 COM port 1 (for connecting the keypad) Remove the keypad, and use the optional keypad relay adapter (CBAD-CP) and a branch adapter for multi-drop (non-Fuji Electric product) as shown in the figure below. Branch adapter for...
  • Page 673 9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication Multi-drop connection using the RS-485 COM port 2 (terminal block) Terminating resistor Host equipment (110 Ω) RS-485 (2-wire system) Shield FRENIC-Ace series Inverter 1 Station No.: 01 Host equipment (2-wire system) RS-485 OUT+ OUT- (4-wire system)

  • Page 674: Connection Devices

    9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication 9.1.4 RS-485 connection devices This section describes the devices required for connecting the inverter to a PC having no RS-485 interface, or for connecting two or more inverters in a multi-drop network. [ 1 ] Converter PCs are generally not equipped with an RS-485 port.

  • Page 675: Noise Suppression

    9.1 Overview of RS-485 Communication 9.1.5 RS-485 noise suppression Depending on the operating environment, a malfunction may occur due to the noise generated by the inverter. Possible measures to prevent such malfunction are: separating the wiring, use of shielded cable, isolating the power supply, and adding an inductance component.

  • Page 676: Frenic Loader Overview

    FRENIC Loader is also equipped with functions which allow users to create logic circuits for the inverter customizable logic function, and to write data to the inverter. This software can be downloaded and used free of charge from the Fuji Electric website. ...
  • Page 677 9.2 FRENIC Loader Overview Item Specifications Remarks Traceback function Data specified before or after the occurrence The output frequency, output of triggers such as alarms is automatically current, intermediate DC stored in the inverter or the keypad memory, voltage, and signals for allowing data to be acquired and waveforms to terminals Y1 to Y5 from 2 be displayed on FRENIC Loader.

  • Page 678: Ethernet Communication Overview

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Ethernet Communication Overview  This chapter provides explanations only in relation to the use of the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). For details on Ethernet connection using the Multiprotocol Ethernet® Communication Card (OPC-CP-ETM), refer to the Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-2467-JE) of the Multiprotocol Ethernet® Communication Card. With the E3N, you can connect the FRENIC-Ace to a master device (PLC, PC for industrial use, etc.) with Ethernet and control the inverter as an “adapter,”...
  • Page 679 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview MAC Address MAC Address FRN0056E3N-2G, FRN0069E3N-2G FRN0088E3N-2G, FRN0115E3N-2G FRN0037E3N-4G, FRN0044E3N-4G FRN0059E3N-4G, FRN0072E3N-4G The E3N type is not equipped with a keypad on the main body. To perform initial settings, test runs, etc., connect the inverter to a PC which has FRENIC-Loader installed, and perform through FRENIC- Loader.

  • Page 680: Setup Procedure For Ethernet Communication

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.1 Setup procedure for Ethernet communication Installation ▼ Connect between the master and this product with the 9.3.2 Cabling this product to the network recommended dedicated cable. ▼ Use the configuration tool on the master side to define and register Configure the master the network and connected devices (inverters).

  • Page 681: Ethernet Cable Connection

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.2 Ethernet cable connection The supported network topology types vary depending on the protocol, as shown in the table below. For details, refer to descriptions of each protocol. Ethernet Port Network Topology Protocol Bus/Daisy Port1 Port2 Star Ring Chain...

  • Page 682: Recommended Communication Cables

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.3 Recommended communication cables To connect this product to an Ethernet network, use an Ethernet dedicated cable that complies with the Ethernet/IP or PROFINET specifications in the table below. Using a cable other than an Ethernet dedicated cable will not guarantee Ethernet/IP or PROFINET performance. Communication cable specifications Conforms to CAT 5e standards Twisted pair cables...

  • Page 683: Function Code Settings For The Inverter

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.4 Function code settings for the inverter [ 1 ] Configuring the IP address Configure the IP address. Function Name Selection Description Code 0: Fixed Set with IP address setting 1 to 4 (o201 to o204). Set with IP address setting 1 to 3 (o201 to o203) + 1: Hard switching Rotary switch (ID-SW)*1.

  • Page 684: 2 ] Selecting The Communication Protocol

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 2 ] Selecting the communication protocol Select the communication protocol. Function Code Name Description 1：PROFINET-RT 2：EtherNet/IP o214 Protocol Settings 3：Modbus TCP * If a new configuration is set with this function code, restart the inverter or write o229 = 1 to apply the new configuration.

  • Page 685: Inverter Response To Network Timeout

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 4 ] Inverter response to network timeout Inverter function codes o27 and o28 specify the inverter’s response when a network timeout occurs. Inverter response to network timeout (Function codes o27 and o28) Inverter Response when a Timeout Remarks Occurs Immediately coast to a stop and er5 trip...

  • Page 686: Setting Up Monitoring And Operation Via Ethernet Communication

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 5 ] Setting up monitoring and operation via Ethernet communication The status of the inverter can be monitored via Ethernet communication if you set the master/scanner/client sides according to the procedure for the selected communication protocol. To monitor and operate via Ethernet communication Set the following function code.

  • Page 687: 6 ] Saving Function Code Settings

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 6 ] Saving function code settings The setting contents of each function code can be saved to the E3N main body. For the E3N type, the factory default settings (function code y97 is set to “1”) specify the temporary memory as the save destination for changed function code settings.

  • Page 688: Protocol Specific Information

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.5 Protocol specific information [ 1 ] EtherNet/IP EtherNet/IP is a protocol that applies CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) to standard Ethernet. Two communication features are provided: - Implicit message communication, which communicates at a fixed cycle (RPI: Requested Packet Interval) - Explicit message communication, which sends and receives at arbitrary timing.
  • Page 689 0x29 the inverter. AC/DC Drive Objects 0x2A Vendor-Specific Objects Class Code Description 0x64 Provides direct access to the inverter function Fuji Electric Specific Objects codes. 0xA2 Other CIP (EtherNet/IP) Class Code Description Common Objects Identity Objects 0x01 Provides general identification information.
  • Page 690 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Data types used in objects Range Data type Description Minimum Maximum BOOL Boolean 0 (False) 1 (True) SINT Signed 8-bit integer value -128 Signed 16-bit integer value -32768 32767 DINT Signed 32-bit integer value USINT Unsigned 8-bit integer value UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer value 65535...
  • Page 691 Access Attribute ID Name Data Type Description Value Rules Identification number of each Vender ID UINT 319 (Fuji Electric) vendor Device Type UINT General type of product 2 (AC drive) Identification of each Product Code UINT 0x2430 vendor's individual product...
  • Page 692 0 to 64 Fuji Drive Assembly Output variable Basic Speed Control Input Input Extended Speed Control Input ( Monitor status from inverter to master) 2 to 64 Fuji Drive Assembly Input variable *1: These Instances are Fuji Electric-specific instances. 9-24...
  • Page 693 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Instance ID = 20, 21 or 100: Can be configured from 0 to 32 WORD (0 Byte to 64 Byte) in WORD size, Instance ID = 70, 71, 150: Can be configured from 1 to 32 WORD (2 Byte to 64 Byte) in WORD size. An I/O Assembly instance is an assembly of data components scattered around each object that are related to motor control.
  • Page 694 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 5) Motor data objects (Class code 0x28) These objects serve as a database of motor parameters. The settings of these objects interact with the parameters of the inverter. Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Data Attribute ID Access Rules Name Description...
  • Page 695 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 6) Control Supervisor objects (Class code 0x29) These objects model all the management features of the motor control device. The settings of these objects interact with the parameters of the inverter. Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Attribute ID Access Rules Name...
  • Page 696 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Instance services Service Code Name Description Switches to Startup state. 0x05 Reset (Sets the speed command to 0 and the instance attribute to the default value.) 0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Reads the content of the specified attribute. 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Writes the content of the specified attribute.
  • Page 697 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 7) AC/DC Drive objects (Class code 0x2A) These objects model functions specific to AC drives such as speed setting and acceleration/deceleration time. The settings of these objects affect the parameters of the inverter. Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Data Attribute ID Access Rules...
  • Page 698 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Access Data Attribute ID Name Description Value Rules Type Range: -32768 to Output voltage (unit: 32767 OutputVoltage INT *According to the value * VoltageScale is set with detected by the attribute 27. inverter. Acceleration time (unit: Range: 0 to 65535 Get/Set AccelTime UINT...
  • Page 699 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 8) QoS objects (Class code 0x48) Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Data Attribute ID Access Rules Name Description Value Type Revision information for this Revision UINT object Maximum number of instances Max Instance UINT of the object currently being created Number of object instances that Number of Instance UINT...
  • Page 700 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9) Fuji vendor-specific objects (Class code 0x64) These objects are addressed to identify the Fuji Electric inverter-specific function code on the profile. Any function code can be written/read directly. Function codes are assigned to one instance for each type (F code, E code, etc.). The function code number is assigned to the attribute ID.
  • Page 701 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Example 2) Function code group M instance attribute (Instance ID: 0x03) Data Attribute ID Access Rules Name Description Type Get/Set Fuji inverter function code M01 UINT M01 data Get/Set Fuji inverter function code M99 UINT M99 data Example 3) Function code group F instance attribute (Instance ID: 0x04) Data Attribute ID...
  • Page 702 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 10) Fuji vendor-specific objects (Class code 0xA2) These objects are addressed to identify the Fuji Electric inverter-specific function code on the profile. Any function code can be written/read directly. Attribute ID is fixed at 1. One function code can be specified by specifying an instance using the following formula.
  • Page 703 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Function Code Type Group Register Usage Example Motor to Name Drive F00: (0 × 256) + 0 + 1 = 1 Basic function F07(Acceleration time 1) : (0 × 256) + 7 + 1 = 8 F99: (0 ×...
  • Page 704 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Function Code Type Group Register Usage Example Motor to Name Drive X00: (16 × 256) + 0 + 1 = 4097 Alarm Data X99: (16 × 256) + 99 + 1 = 4196 Z00: (17 × 256) + 0 + 1 = 4353 Alarm Data 2 Z99: (17 ×...
  • Page 705 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 11) TCP/IP Interface objects (Class code 0xF5) Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Data Attribute ID Access Rules Name Description Value Type Revision information for this Revision UINT object Maximum number of instances Max Instance UINT of the object currently being created Number of object instances that Number of Instance...
  • Page 706 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Access Attribute ID Name Data Type Description Value* Rules STRUNT of IP multicast address Mcast Config configuration Multicast address allocation Alloc Control USINT control word. Determines how addresses are allocated. Reserved USINT Number of IP Multicast Num Mcast UINT addresses to allocate for...
  • Page 707 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 12) Ethernet Link objects (Class code 0xF6) Class attribute (Instance ID: 0x00) Data Attribute ID Access Rules Name Description Value Type Revision information for this Revision UINT object Maximum number of instances Max Instance UINT of the object currently being created Number of object instances that Number of Instance...
  • Page 708 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Access Attribute ID Name Data Type Description Value* Rules Media STRUCT of Media-specific counter Counters Frames received that are not an Alignment UDINT integral number of octets in Errors length Frames received that do not FCS Errors UDINT pass the FCS check Successfully transmitted frames...
  • Page 709 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Access Attribute ID Name Data Type Description Value* Rules Current state of the interface: Interface State USINT “The interface is operational, disabled, etc. enabled” Administrative state: enable, Get/Set Admin State USINT “Enable the disable interface” 06 50 6f 72 74 20 “Port 1”...
  • Page 710 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Instance services Service Code Name Description 0x01 Get_Attribute_All Reads the content of all attributes. 0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Reads the content of the specified attribute. 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Writes the content of the specified attribute. 9-42...
  • Page 711 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (2) Description of each I/O instance When using more than one of instance IDs 20, 21, and 150 for IO communication, do not set the same value for the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) of IDs 20 and 150, or IDs 21 and 150. Also, do not set ID 20 and ID 21 at the same time.
  • Page 712 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 2) Extension I/O instance Output (master → inverter): Extended speed control output Instance Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Fault NetRef NetCtrl Run Rev Run Fwd Reset (Fixed at 0) (0x15) Speed Reference (lower Byte) (r/min) Speed Reference (upper Byte) (r/min) Run Fwd (Forward rotation command): 0 = Stop, 1 = Forward rotation command ON Run Rev (Reverse rotation command): 0 = Stop, 1 = Reverse rotation command ON...
  • Page 713 3) Fuji drive assembly output This format is specific to Fuji Electric. Up to 32 function codes of the inverter can be specified and written from the master to inverter. The write function codes can be specified by setting those to the function codes o221 to o252 of the inverter.
  • Page 714 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 4) Fuji drive assembly input This format is specific to Fuji Electric. Up to 32 function codes of the inverter can be specified and read from the inverter to master. The readout function codes can be specified by setting those to the function codes o253 to o284 of the inverter.
  • Page 715 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (4) Error code list for explicit message errors If an explicit message sent from the master contains any error, the communication card responds to the master with the error codes in the table below. The error codes consist of two bytes: the General code and the Additional code. Errors without Additional codes are indicated by “0xFF.”...
  • Page 716 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (5) Class3 explicit message (Tag name） Class 3 explicit messages can read/write the function code of the inverter (CIP Data Table Read/CIP Data Table Write) using the tag name. For the tag name, specify the inverter function code as an ASCII character string. The function code group is expressed by one or two characters, and the function code number is expressed by two characters from 00 to 99.

  • Page 717: Profidrive Communication Profile

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 2 ] PROFINET IO PROFINET is a communication standard for automation created by PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI). By installing this product, inverters can be used as a PROFINET IO Device By using PROFINET, it is possible to save wiring, construct networks in various topologies, perform real-time communication, and coexist with IT and control communication.
  • Page 718 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Telegram 101 Telegram101 can specify up to 32 user-configurable I/O datafiles. To specify I/O data, set the desired function code group and number to the function codes o221 to o252 (write) and o253 to o284 (read). Drive profile Telegram101 input/output list I/O Word Offset Output Data (Master →...
  • Page 719 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (2) Control Word (STW1) Telegram1 and Telegram100 send commands from the control word and status notifications to the status word according to PROFIDrive specifications. The configuration of the control word STW1 and the meaning of each bit is shown in the table below.
  • Page 720 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (3) Status Word (ZSW1) The configuration of the status word (ZSW1) that notifies the status of the inverter and the meaning of each bit is shown in the table below. Configuration of status word (ZSW1) Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4...
  • Page 721 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (4) Speed command (NSOLL_A) and speed Monitor (NIST_A) NSOLL_A is a Speed setpoint A, and shows the output-frequency setting data. This is used to set the normal operation frequency. NSOLL_A does not operate when high priority frequency setting such as multi-stage frequency operation or JOG operation is selected.
  • Page 722 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Operation by frequency command [Hz] For details on how to operate the PROFINET IO controller, refer to the instruction manual for your PROFINET IO controller.  For details, refer to the PROFINET IO Controller Instruction Manual. An operation example is shown below.
  • Page 723 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Operation using Telegram 101 The following shows an operation example with Telegram 101. Telegram 101 makes it possible to control the inverter using Fuji Electric inverter-specific function codes without using STW1 and NSOLL_A. • Set F03 = 50.0Hz •...
  • Page 724 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Operation using Telegram 101 Output word 1 Input word 1 Output word 2 Input word 1 Time ① Write 0x001 (forward rotation command FWD = ON) to Output Word 2 of Telegram101. ② Write 20000 (50.00 Hz) to Output Word 1 of Telegram101. ③...
  • Page 725 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (5) PROFIDrive state transition The figure below shows a state transition diagram of the PROFIDrive. Immediately after the inverter is turned ON, the status first moves to S1 "Not ready to turn a run command ON." Bit manipulation in STW1 transitions to the S2 status "Ready to turn a run command ON,"...
  • Page 726 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview (6) Acyclic communication data access The function codes of the inverter can be read and written via acyclic (non-periodic) communication between the master and the inverter. For acyclic communication to access the function codes, set 0xB02E (Base Mode Parameter Access Local) in the INDEX of the Record Data object in sub-slot No.1 of slot No.1.
  • Page 727 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Response formats for base mode parameter access Block definition Byte N Byte N+1 Supplement Response ID 0x01: Read parameter OK Request reference 1 to 0x02: Write parameter OK Response header 0x81: Parameter read NAK (4Byte) 0x82: Parameter write NAK Axis-No./DO-ID Number of parameters (0 or 1) (Fixed at 1)

  • Page 728: Profidrive Parameters

    － Byte1: Profile = 3, Profile ID OctetString2 Byte 2: PROFIDrive Version = 42(4.2) Drive Object identity PNU975 [0] : Manufacturer Fuji Electric Co., [0] to [9] Ltd. (0015h) DO Identification Unsignd16 PNU975 [1] : DO type (0) PNU975 [2] : Firmware version...
  • Page 729 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview PNU975 [4] : Firmware date (day/month) PNU975 [5] : DO type class Axis (1) PNU975 [6] : DO type sub class1 AC1 (1) PNU975 [7] : Drive Object ID (1) PNU975 [8] to [9] : Reserve (0) 980 to Array [n] Defined parameter number...
  • Page 730 By specifying PNUs and Subindex based on the function code numbers, Read/Write access to the function codes specific to Fuji Electric inverters can be realized. Refer to the following equations for how to specify PNUs. A list of typical PNUs is shown on the next page.
  • Page 731 I&M0 provides identification information about the product. During configuration, you can write equipment identification information and installation locations to I&M1, installation dates to I&M2, and comments to I&M3. I&M0 Content Size Content Description Byte MANUFACTURER_ID Fuji Electric : 0x0015 (21) ORDER_ID FRENIC-Ace (E3N) SERIAL_NUMBER Same as MAC address HARDWARE_REVISION Hardware version SOFTWARE_REVISION...

  • Page 732: Modbus Tcp

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 3 ] Modbus TCP The Modbus TCP server function communicates with the master devices (up to 8) with Client functions.The supported Modbus function codes are shown in Table 9.3-1 List of supported function codes”. Table 9.3-1 List of supported function codes Function Code Command Remarks...
  • Page 733 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Description of the functions Read Coil: 1 (0x01) This function reads multiple successive coils. Read the start address of the coil and specify the number of coils in the request frame. Coil number Remarks S06: Operation command －...
  • Page 734 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Read Discrete Inputs: 2 (0x02) This function reads multiple successive inputs. Read the start address and specify the number of inputs in the request frame. In the request and response frames, the function code is 0x02 and the error code is 0x82 as with Read Coil:1.
  • Page 735 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [Response (Error)] Data Byte Length Name Description Remarks (Decimal) (Byte) Error code Error code 0x83 0x01: Function not supported 0x02: “Start address + number of Extension code Extension code registers” is out of range 0x03: Invalid number of registers (0 or exceeding number) 9-67...
  • Page 736 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Read Input Registers: 4 (0x04) This function reads multiple successive input registers. Read the start address of the register and specify the number of registers in the request frame. In the request and response frames, the function code is 0x04 and the error code is 0x84 as with Read Holding Registers:3.
  • Page 737 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Write Single Register: 6 (0x06) This function writes the register value to a single holding register. Specify the holding register address and the register value in the request frame. Real examples of start address specification are shown below. Example 1) With the function code E15, specify E = 0x01 Number = 0x0F(15) for the start address.
  • Page 738 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Write Multiple Coils: 15 (0x0F) This function writes the ON/OFF output value to multiple successive coils. Specify the coil start address, the number of coils to which to write, and the ON/OFF output value in the request frame. * Data is stored from its LSB, beginning from the smallest coil number.
  • Page 739 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Write Multiple Registers: 16 (0x10) This function writes to successive holding registers. Specify the coil start address, the number of registers to which to write, and the register value in the request frame. Real examples of start address specification are shown below. Example 1) With the function code E15, specify E = 0x01 Number = 0x0F(15) for the start address.
  • Page 740 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [Response (Error)] Data Byte Length Name Description Remarks (Decimal) (Byte) Error code Error code 0x90 0x01: Function not supported 0x02: “Start address + number of registers” is out of range 0x03: Invalid number of registers Extension code Extension code (0 or exceeding number) or the byte count is not the...
  • Page 741 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.6 Specifications (Ethernet) [ 1 ] Ethernet specifications The table below lists the common Ethernet specifications of this product. Item Description Connector Type RJ-45 connector with shielding, CAT5e or higher UTP or STP cable For details, refer to the following websites. Ethernet Cable •...

  • Page 742: Ethernet/Ip Specifications

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 2 ] Ethernet/IP specifications The table below lists Ethernet/IP specifications supported by this product. Item Specifications ODVA Ethernet/IP Declaration of Conformity (CT-19) Conformance Tested Vendor ID Product Code 0x2432 Product Type Code 2 (AC Drive) UCMM Supported Class 3 (Explicit) Messaging...
  • Page 743 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 3 ] PROFINET IO specifications The table below lists PROFINET specifications supported by this product. Item Description PROFINET V2.43 Certificate Conformance Tested Vendor ID 0x0015 Device ID 0x2432 Device Type PROFINET IO Device Device Name Unassigned (Factory default setting) Protocol Level RT (Real-Time)
  • Page 744 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 4 ] Modbus TCP specifications The table below lists the Modbus TCP communication specifications supported by this product. Table 9.3-2 Modbus TCP communication specifications Item Specifications Remarks Number of Connections Reads up to 100 registers (100 Max Read Register Size 125 registers registers for one function code)
  • Page 745 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.7 Setting inverter function codes Specify the function code type (refer to the table below) and number with four hexadecimal digits as shown below to access the function codes using the 0x64 class of EtherNet/IP. However, it is ignored when there is no function code in the inverter. Function code number (In hexadecimal) Function code group (According to appendix in the table below.) Function code type (EtherNet/IP 0x64 class)
  • Page 746 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview Use the table below when accessing the function codes using EtherNet/IP class 0xA2 or Modbus TCP. Function code type (EtherNet/IP 0xA2 class, Modbus TCP) Type Type Code Function Code Name Type Type Code Function Code Name Command/Function Data Alarm Data 2 Motor 3/Speed Control 3...
  • Page 747 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview 9.3.8 About the display content of Ethernet built-in type (E3N) [ 1 ] Explanations of each display section The monitor display section on the front of the E3N displays the inverter and communication status. 7-segment LED PWR LED ALARM LED MODULE STATUS LED...
  • Page 748 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 2 ] LED status (Ethernet/IP) LED Name Color Description Remarks Status Power OFF During self-diagnosis test at startup Each LED turns on for 0.25 seconds for indicator Green/Red Alternate Test performed tests at startup blinking for 1 second MS (Green) ON→MS (Red) →NS (Green) →NS (Red) →...
  • Page 749 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 3 ] LED status (PROFINET) LED Name Color LED Status Description Remarks Power OFF During self-diagnosis test at startup Green/ Each LED turns on for 0.25 seconds for indicator Alternate Test performed tests at startup blinking for 1 second MS (Green) ON→MS (Red) →NS (Green) →NS...
  • Page 750 9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 4 ] LED status (Modbus TCP) LED Name Color Description Remarks Status Power OFF During self-diagnosis test at startup Each LED turns on for 0.25 seconds for indicator Green/Red Alternate Test performed tests at startup blinking for 1 second MS (Green) ON→MS (Red) →NS (Green) →NS...

  • Page 751: 7-Segment Led Display

    9.3 Ethernet Communication Overview [ 5 ] 7-segment LED display The front display of the display section changes depending on the inverter status. Details of descriptions are as follows. Status Code When the power to the FE is displayed 1s after power on. inverter is turned ON.

  • Page 752: Communications-Dedicated Function Codes

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Communications-dedicated Function Codes Communications dedicated function codes are available to monitor the operation and status of the inverter via communications. They are classified into the groups shown in Table 9.4-1 below: Table 9.4-1 Types of communications-dedicated function codes Communications-dedicated Function Function Code Group...

  • Page 753: Command Data

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes 9.4.1 Command data The table below shows the function codes (S codes) for the command data. Table 9.4-2 List of command data Permissible Setting Code Name Function R/W *1 Range Frequency command issued -32768 to 32767 Reference through communications (the (Max frequency: at +/-...
  • Page 754 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes 9.4.2 Monitor Data 1 Function codes for Monitor Data 1 (M codes) are described below. These function codes are for reading only. Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes Code Name Description Monitor Range Frequency command Frequency command based on the -32768 to 32767 (±20,000 (p.u.)
  • Page 755 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes (cont’d) Code Name Description Monitor Range Cumulative run time 0 to 65535 Displays the DC link circuit voltage DC link circuit voltage 0 to 1000 of the inverter. Displays the series, generation, model, destination and voltage Model code 0000...

  • Page 756: To 65535 H Y

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes (cont’d) Code Name Description Monitor Range Running status on Data equivalent to M14 on alarm 0000 to FFFF alarm General-purpose output terminal Data equivalent to M15 on alarm 0000 to FFFF information on alarm Cumulative run time...

  • Page 757: H To Ffff H - Y

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes (cont’d) Code Name Description Monitor Range Motor output based on the motor's Motor output -327.68 to 327.67 rated output (kW) Motor output on Data equivalent to M64 on alarm -20000 to 20000 alarm Speed detection value based on...
  • Page 758 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes (cont’d) Code Name Description Monitor Range Latest warning indicated with a Warning (latest) 0 to 254 code Warning (last) Last warning indicated with a code 0 to 254 Second last warning indicated with Warning (second last) 0 to 254 a code...

  • Page 759: To 327.67 % Y

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-3 Monitor Data 1 function codes (cont’d) Code Name Description Monitor Range Displays the model and the Extension model M123 generation with four-digit 0000 to FFFF code hexadecimal data. M125 IP address monitor 1 OPC-ECT IPv4 address 0 to 255 M126 IP address monitor 2...

  • Page 760: Monitor Data

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes 9.4.3 Monitor Data 2 Function codes for Monitor Data 2 (W codes) are described below. Monitor Data 2 is linked to the keypad display. All of these function codes are for read only. For the E3N type, replace all instances of [FM1] in the table below with [FM]. Table 9.4-4 Monitor Data 2 (W codes) Code Name...
  • Page 761 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-4 Monitor Data 2 (W codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks PID output expressed by a percentage with setting the PID output 0 to 150.0 maximum frequency (F03) to 100% Inverter's analog input Analog input monitor -999 to 9990 converted by E40 and E41...
  • Page 762 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-4 Monitor Data 2 (W codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks Cumulative run time of cooling fan 0 to 9999 Cumulative run time 0 to 65535 DC link circuit voltage 0 to 1000 Internal air highest temperature 0 to 255 °C...
  • Page 763 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-5 Keypad-related function codes (W1 codes) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks Western calendar 2 digits W101 Current year and month 0000 to FFFF (higher order bytes), year (lower order bytes) Day (higher order bytes), W102 Current day and hour 0000 to FFFF...
  • Page 764 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-5 Keypad-related function codes (W1 codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks W170 Cumulative run time (long-term) 0 to 9999 Multi-function keypad thermistor W171 -30 to 200 °C temperature value Multi-function keypad battery voltage W172 0.00 to 5.00 value...

  • Page 765: Alarm Information

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes 9.4.4 Alarm Information Function codes for alarm (X and Z codes) are described below. All of these function codes are for read only. Table 9.4-6 Alarm-related function codes (X codes) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks Alarm history (latest) 0000 to FFFF...
  • Page 766 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-6 Alarm-related function codes (X codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks (DC link circuit voltage) 0 to 1000 (internal air temperature) 0 to 255 °C (heat sink temperature) 0 to 255 °C (input terminal) 0000 to FFFF (output terminal) 0000 to FFFF...
  • Page 767 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-6 Alarm-related function codes (X codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks X105 Alarm occurrence year and month (latest) 0000 to FFFF X106 Alarm occurrence day and hour (latest) 0000 to FFFF X107 Alarm occurrence minutes and seconds (latest) 0000 to FFFF X115...
  • Page 768 9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-7 Alarm-related function codes (Z codes) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks Second last info. on alarm 0.00 to 655.35 (output frequency) (output current) 0.00 to 655.35 (output voltage) 0 to 1000 (torque) -999 to 999 (set frequency) 0.00 to 655.35 (operation status) 0000 to FFFF...

  • Page 769: To 655.35 Hz Y

    9.4 Communications-dedicated Function Codes Table 9.4-7 Alarm-related function codes (Z codes) (cont’d) Code Name Monitor Range Unit Remarks Third last info. on alarm 0.00 to 655.35 (output frequency) (output current) 0.00 to 655.35 (output voltage) 0 to 1000 (torque) -999 to 999 (reference frequency) 0.00 to 655.35 (operation status) 0000 to FFFF...

  • Page 771: Selecting Optimal Motor And Inverter Capacities

    Chapter 10 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter describes the optimal motor and inverter capacities selection. This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, capacity selection procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It also helps to select the braking resistors, inverter mode (HD/ND/HHD/HND), and motor drive control.

  • Page 773: Motor Output Torque Characteristics

    10.1 Motor Output Torque Characteristics When selecting a general-purpose inverter, select the motor, followed by the inverter. Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity. Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g., acceleration time, deceleration time, and frequency of operation) of the load machine to be driven by the motor selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
  • Page 774 10.1 Motor Output Torque Characteristics Continuous allowable driving torque 1) Standard motor (Curve (a1) in Figure 10.1-1 and Figure 10.1-2) Curve (a1) shows the torque that can be obtained in the range of the inverter’s continuous rated current, where the standard motor's cooling characteristic is taken into consideration. When the motor runs at the base frequency of 60 Hz, 100 % output torque can be obtained;...

  • Page 775: Selection Procedure

    10.2 Selection Procedure 10.2 Selection Procedure Fig. 10.2-1 "Selection procedure” shows the general capacity selection procedure. Items numbered (1) through (5) are described on the following pages. You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times. If there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time, or if acceleration and deceleration are frequent, then the selection procedure is more complex.
  • Page 776 10.2 Selection Procedure Load torque calculation when running at constant speed (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.1) It is essential to calculate the load torque for all loads when running at constant speed. First calculate the load torque of the motor when running at constant speed and then select a tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor when running at constant speed becomes higher than the load torque.
  • Page 777 10.2 Selection Procedure Calculation of the deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 10.3.2 [ 3 ]) To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole range of potential speeds in the same way as for the acceleration time. 1) Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor.

  • Page 778: Equations For Selections

    10.3 Equations for Selections 10.3 Equations for Selections 10.3.1 Load torque calculation when running at constant speed [ 1 ] General equation Loads carried horizontally must be driven by outputting a force corresponding to the frictional force acting on the load.
  • Page 779 10.3 Equations for Selections ■ Vertical lift load A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 10.3-2. If the mass of the cage is W (kg), the mass of the load is W (kg), and the mass of the balance weight is W (kg), then the forces F (N) required for lifting the load up and down are expressed as follows (Equation 10.3-5 and Equation 10.3-6).

  • Page 780: Acceleration And Deceleration Time Calculation

    10.3 Equations for Selections 10.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m ) rotates at the speed N (min ), it has the following kinetic energy (Equation 10.3-9): 2π∙N (Equation 10.3-9) · To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased;...
  • Page 781 10.3 Equations for Selections For a general rotating body Table 10.3-1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the above cylindrical rotating body. Table 10.3-1 Moment of inertia of various rotating bodies Weight: W (kg) Weight: W (kg) Shape Shape...

  • Page 782: 2 ] Calculation Of The Acceleration Time

    10.3 Equations for Selections For a load running horizontally Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 10.3-1. If the table speed is υ (m/s) when the motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60· / (2·NM) (m). The moment of inertia of the table and load in relation to the shaft is calculated as follows (Equation 10.3-13): 60υ...

  • Page 783: 3 ] Calculation Of The Deceleration Time

    10.3 Equations for Selections [ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time In a load system shown in Figure 10.3-5, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of N (r/min) is generally calculated with the following equation (Equation 10.3-16): ＋J ∙η...

  • Page 784: 5 ] Calculating Non-Linear Deceleration Time

    10.3 Equations for Selections Constant output power in N ≤N ≤ N1] 60・P (Equation 10.3-19) (N·m) τ 2π・N Ｍ If the result obtained by the above calculation does not satisfy the target value, select an inverter with one rank higher capacity. [ 5 ] Calculating non-linear deceleration time The calculation for deceleration time is the same as that for acceleration time.

  • Page 785: Heat Energy Calculation Of Braking Resistor

    10.3 Equations for Selections 10.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor If the inverter brakes the motor, the mechanical energy is regenerated into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is often consumed in braking resistors as heat. The following explains how to calculate this energy. [ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy In inverter operation, one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated when an inertial...

  • Page 786: Calculating The Rms Rating Of The Motor

    10.3 Equations for Selections 10.3.4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor In case of a load which is repeatedly and frequently driven by a motor, the motor current fluctuates greatly and repeatedly enters the short-term rating range of the motor. Therefore, you must review the allowable thermal rating of the motor and take steps as necessary.

  • Page 787: Selecting An Inverter Drive Mode (Nd/Hd/Hnd/Hhd)

    10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) 10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) 10.4.1 Precautions in making the selection The FRENIC-Ace is available in four different drive modes—ND and HND modes for general loads and HD and HHD modes for heavy-duty loads, which allows users to switch the drive modes on site. Select the inverter capacity appropriate to the user application, considering the motor capacity, overload characteristics, and ND/HD/HND/HHD mode, referring to “10.4.2 Guidelines for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity”...
  • Page 788 10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) Table 10.4-1 lists the functional differences between ND, HD, HND, and HHD modes. ND mode Function HHD mode HND mode HD mode HND mode Application Heavy-duty load General load Heavy-duty load General load Data for function code Continuous...
  • Page 789 10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) (*1) FRN0012E3△-2G, FRN0020E3△-2G: Carrier frequency setting range: 0.75 ~ 10 kHz Fig. 10.4-1 Output current derating according to carrier frequency (three-phase 200 V) 10-17...
  • Page 790 10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) Fig. 10.4-2 Output current derating according to carrier frequency (three-phase 400 V) 10-18...
  • Page 791 10.4 Selecting an Inverter Drive Mode (ND/HD/HND/HHD) (*1) FRN0001E3△-7G to FRN0012E3△-7G : HND mode Fig. 10.4-3 Output current derating according to carrier frequency (single-phase 200 V) 10-19...
  • Page 793 Chapter 11 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Ace’s configuration with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals. Contents 11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace ················································································· 11-1 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals ·························································...
  • Page 794 11.6.3 External Dimensions ···················································································· 11-55 11.6.4 Peripheral equipment ··················································································· 11-56 11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) ························································································· 11-61 11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) ·························································································· 11-64 11.9 Output Circuit Filters ·························································································· 11-67 11.10 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) ············································ 11-69 11.11 External Cooling Attachments ·············································································· 11-70 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview ·······················································...

  • Page 795: Configuring The Frenic-Ace

    11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace 11.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Ace This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-Ace as well as a configuration example. Fig. 11.1-1 Connection configuration diagram 11-1...

  • Page 796: Currents Flowing Across The Inverter Terminals

    11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment and options for each inverter--including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating.
  • Page 797 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 Currents flowing across the inverter terminals (cont’d) HD mode (kW rating motor) 50Hz, 400V 60Hz, 440V Braking Standard resistor DC link DC link Input RMS current (A) Input RMS current (A) Power supply applicable Inverter type...
  • Page 798 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 Currents flowing across the inverter terminals (cont’d) HND mode (kW rating motor) 50Hz, 200V/400V 60Hz, 220V/440V Braking Standard resistor Input RMS current (A) DC link Input RMS current (A) DC link Power supply applicable Inverter type...
  • Page 799 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 Currents flowing across the inverter terminals (cont’d) HND mode (HP rating motor) 60Hz, 230V/460V Braking Standard DC link Input RMS current (A) Power supply resistor applicable Inverter type DC reactors (DCRs) voltage circuit motor (HP)
  • Page 800 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 Currents flowing across the inverter terminals (cont’d) HHD mode (kW rating motor) 50Hz, 200V/400V 60Hz, 220V/440V Braking Standard resistor Input RMS current (A) DC link Input RMS current (A) DC link Power supply applicable Inverter type...
  • Page 801 11.2 Currents Flowing Across the Inverter Terminals Table 11.2-1 Currents flowing across the inverter terminals (cont’d) HHD mode (HP rating motor) 60Hz, 230V/460V Braking Standard DC link Input RMS current (A) Power supply resistor applicable Inverter type DC reactors (DCRs) voltage circuit motor (HP)

  • Page 802: Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Mccb), Residual-Current-Operated Protective Device (Rcd)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (Elcb) And Magnetic Contactor (Mc)

    11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) 11.3.1 Function overview MCCBs and RCDs/ELCBs* * With overcurrent protection Molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power supply and inverter’s main circuit terminals ([L1/R], [L2/S] and [L3/T]) from overload or short-circuit, which in turn prevents...

  • Page 803: Connection Example And Criteria For Selection Of Circuit Breakers

    11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) 11.3.2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers Figure 11.3-1 shows a connection example for MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) and MC in the inverter input circuit.
  • Page 804 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) Table 11.3-1 Rated current of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) ND mode (kW rating motor) Magnetic contactor (MC) MCCB, RCD/ELCB rated...
  • Page 805 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) Table 11.3-1 Rated current of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) (cont’d) HND mode (kW rating motor) Magnetic contactor (MC) MCCB, RCD/ELCB rated...
  • Page 806 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) Table 11.3-1 Rated current of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) (cont’d) HHD mode (kW rating motor) Magnetic contactor (MC) MCCB, RCD/ELCB rated...
  • Page 807 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) Table 11.3-1 Rated current of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) (cont’d) ND, HD, HND, HHD mode (HP rating motor) Magnetic contactor (MC) MCCB, RCD/ELCB...
  • Page 808 11.3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), Residual-current-operated Protective Device (RCD)/Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) and Magnetic Contactor (MC) Table 11.3-2 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of RCDs/ELCBs (with overcurrent protection) and wiring length of the inverter output circuits. Note that the sensitivity levels listed in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor.

  • Page 809: Braking Resistors (Dbrs)

    11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) 11.4.1 Selecting a braking resistor If the load inertia is high, or if accelerating or decelerating suddenly to rotate away from the load side, the inverter induces an overvoltage trip (OU) with regenerative energy from the load. Furthermore, if braking resistor overheating (DBH) occurs in models with built-in braking resistor, it means that the built-in braking resistor capacity is insufficient.

  • Page 810: 1 ] Standard Type

    11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) 11.4.2 Braking resistors (DBRs) A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from the deceleration of the motor to heat. Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter. [ 1 ] Standard type The standard type is equipped with a function for outputting temperature detection signals.

  • Page 811: Specifications

    11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) 11.4.3 Specifications Table 11.4-1 Braking resistor (standard type) ND mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) Standard or less) applicable Power Average motor supply Inverter type...
  • Page 812 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) Table 11.4-3 Braking resistor (standard type) HND mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) Standard or less) applicable Power motor Average supply Inverter type Discharging Braking...
  • Page 813 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) Table 11.4-4 Braking resistor (standard type) HHD mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) Standard or less) applicable Power Average motor supply Inverter type Discharging Braking...
  • Page 814 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) Table 11.4-5 Braking resistors (10% ED type) ND mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) or less) Standard Power applicable motor Average supply Inverter type Discharging...
  • Page 815 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) HND mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) or less) Standard Power applicable motor Average supply Inverter type Discharging Braking Duty Braking resistor 50Hz 60Hz allowable...
  • Page 816 11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) Table 11.4-6 Braking resistors (10% ED type) (cont’d) HHD mode (kW/HP rating motor) Repetitive braking Maximum braking Continuous braking Selecting Options (each cycle is 100 s torque (100% braking torque) Standard or less) applicable Power Average motor (kW) supply Inverter type...

  • Page 817: External Dimensions

    11.4 Braking Resistors (DBRs) 11.4.4 External dimensions Braking resistors, standard type Power Dimensions mm(inch) Mass supply Type Figure kg (lb) voltage DB0.75-2 68 (2.7) 310 (12.2) 295 (11.6) 67 (2.6) 1.3 (2.9) DB2.2-2 80 (3.2) 345 (13.6) 332 (13.1) 94 (3.7) 2.0 (4.4) DB3.7-2 80 (3.2)

  • Page 818: High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration Pwm Converters (Rhc Series)

    200 V: 30kW to 90kW , 400 V: 45kW to 630kW) and the FRENIC-eRHC series lineup comprises more compact models than the conventional models. Fuji Electric also offers a lineup of small-capacity models. (Capacity range 200 V: 5.5kW to 22kW , 400 V: 5.5kW to 75kW)
  • Page 819 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) If an old inverter (FRENIC5000VG7S, FRENIC5000G11S) is replaced by FRENIC-Ace, it might be necessary to make changes to the wiring. For details, refer to Appendix G “Inverter Replacement Precautions (When Using PWM Converter (RHC series)).” 11-25...

  • Page 820: Specifications

    11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) 11.5.2 Specifications [ 1 ] Standard specifications MD (CT) mode (for medium overloads) Three-phase 200 V input series (unit type) Item Specification Type: RHC□-2EJ Applicable inverter capacity [kW] Continuous capacity [kW] Overload rating Continuous rating of 150%-1 min Voltage...
  • Page 821 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) Three-phase 400 V input series (unit type) Item Specification Type: RHC□-4EJ Applicable inverter capacity [kW] Continuous capacity [kVA] Overload rating Continuous rating of 150%-1 min Voltage 640 to 710 VDC (varies based on input voltage) (*2) Main power supply Number of phases, Three-phase three-wire system, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz (*1)
  • Page 822 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) LD (VT) mode (for low overload) Three-phase 200 V input series (unit type) Item Specification Type: RHC□-2EJ Applicable inverter capacity [kW] Continuous capacity [kW] Overload rating Continuous rating of 120%-1 min Voltage 320 to 355 VDC (varies based on input voltage) (*2) Main power supply...
  • Page 823 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) Three-phase 400 V input series (unit type) Item Specification Type: RHC□-4EJ Applicable inverter capacity [kW] Continuous capacity [kVA] Output Overload rating Continuous rating of 120%-1 min Voltage 640 to 710 VDC (varies based on input voltage) (*2) Main power supply Number of phases, Three-phase three-wire system, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz (*1)

  • Page 824: 2 ] Common Specifications

    11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) [ 2 ] Common specifications Specifications Item Unit type Control method AVR constant control with DC ACR minor By turning the power ON following connection, rectification is performed, boosting Operation method operation is performed with a run signal (RUN-CM short circuit, or run command through communication), and the unit is ready for operation.
  • Page 825 0.95 (only during regenerative operation). *2: The optional AC blown fuse detection card (OPC RHCE ACF) is necessary. *3: The FRENIC-RHC Loader software can be downloaded from Fe Library, Fuji Electric’s dedicated material resource site.

  • Page 826: Function Specifications

    R1, T1 Fan power supply Ri and T1-Ti shorted when shipped. If using the fan power supply independently, consult your Fuji Electric representative. Synchronous power This is a detection terminal used for the control inside the converter, and is Ri, Si, Ti (unit type) supply input for connected to the dedicated reactor and dedicated filter power supply side.
  • Page 827 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) ■ Communication specifications Item Specification Operating information, running status, function code monitor function (polling), and RUN, RST, and X1 General communication control (selecting) is possible. specifications * Function code writing is not possible. 【DX+】, RS-485 (built in as Communication is possible with the PC or PLC (Fuji standard and RTU protocols are supported).
  • Page 828 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) ■ Function settings Function code Name Data protection High-frequency filter selection Restart mode after momentary power failure (Operation selection) Current rating switching LED monitor display selection LCD monitor display selection LCD monitor language selection LCD monitor contrast adjustment Carrier frequency...
  • Page 829 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) ■ Protective functions Item Display Protection specification This is activated when the external AC fuse blows due to shorting or damage to the internal AC blown fuse circuit. If using this function, an AC fuse with option or microswitch is required. This is activated if the AC power supply voltage exceeds the AC overvoltage detection level.
  • Page 830 (Note 1) Please contact Fuji Electric if sulfurized gas is produced in the location where the product is installed. (Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint, cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink of the inverter.

  • Page 831: Device Configuration

    If not using a charging circuit box, a fuse with microswitch for blown fuse detection can be prepared. In such a case, there is no need for the OPC-RHCE-ACF. Please contact Fuji Electric. (*5) If a blown fuse is detected, install the OPC-RHCE-ACF card for AC blown fuse detection.
  • Page 832 If not using a charging circuit box, a fuse with microswitch for blown fuse detection can be prepared. In such a case, there is no need for the OPC-RHCE-ACF. Please contact Fuji Electric. (*5) If a blown fuse is detected, install the OPC-RHCE-ACF card for AC blown fuse detection.
  • Page 833 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) ■ Basic connection drawings RHC30-2EJ to RHC90-2EJ MD and LD Mode RHC280-4EJ to RHC630-4EJ MD Mode RHC45-4EJ to RHC220-4EJ MD and LD Mode RHC280-4EJ to RHC400-4EJ LD Mode CU (Charging box) Converter Inverter Converter...

  • Page 834: External Dimensions

    11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) 11.5.5 External dimensions PWM converter unit Figure A Figure B Figure C Hoisting hole Dimensions (mm) Approx. PWM converter type Figure Capacity weight (kg) RHC30-2EJ RHC37-2EJ RHC45-2EJ 200V series RHC55-2EJ RHC75-2EJ RHC90-2EJ...
  • Page 835 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Boosting reactor> Figure A Figure B 6-terminal hole (M screw) 6-terminal (M screw) Detailed view of terminal Dimensions (mm) Approx. Boosting reactor type Figure weight (kg) LR2-37C 48±2 LR2-55C 200V series LR2-75C LR2-110C...
  • Page 836 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Filter reactor> Figure A Figure B 6-terminal 6-terminal hole hole (M screw) (M screw) Elongate hole Figure C Figure D 6-terminal hole (M screw) 6-terminal hole (M screw) Detailed view of terminal Dimensions (mm) Approximate...
  • Page 837 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Filter capacitor> Figure A Figure B Mounting holes Mounting holes 3-terminal bolts 3-terminal bolts (J Screw) (J Screw) Mounting feet Mounting feet Mounting feet Dimensions (mm) Approximate Filter capacitor type Figure weight [kg] CF2-37C...
  • Page 838 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Filter resistor> Figure A Figure B Terminal Eye bolts Figure C Eye bolts Terminal Earth terminal Mounting holes Dimensions (mm) Approximate Filter resistor type Figure weight [kg] GRZG400 0.1 Ω 0.85 200V series GRZG400 0.12 Ω...
  • Page 839 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Charging box> The charging box contains a combination of a charging resistor and a fuse, which is essential in the configuration of the RHC-E series of PWM converters. Using this charging box eases mounting and wiring jobs. ■...
  • Page 840 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Charging resistors> Figure B Figure A Dimensions (mm) Approximate Charging resistor type Figure weight [kg] GRZG120 2 Ω 0.25 GRZG400 1 Ω 0.85 80 W 7.5 Ω (HF5C5504) 0.19 11-46...
  • Page 841 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) <Fuses> Figure A Figure B Figure C Side view of A70P1600-4TA Side view of A70P2000-4 Dimensions (mm) Approximate Fuse type Figure weight [kg] CR2L-200/UL 33.5 11x13 0.13 CR2L-260/UL 200V series CR2L-400/UL 11x13 0.22...
  • Page 842 11.5 High Power Factor Power Supply Regeneration PWM Converters (RHC Series) Generated loss In MD mode Unit Boosting reactor Filter reactor Filter resistor Generated Generated Generated Generated loss Type Type Type Type loss [W] loss [W] loss [W] RHC30-2EJ LR2-37C LFC2-37C RHC37-2EJ 1200...

  • Page 843: Compact Power Regeneration Pwm Converter

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter This is a more compact, lightweight product than the RHC series in section 11.5, and similarly, since the power supply side current is converted into a sine wave with PWM control combined with an inverter, thereby significantly reducing harmonic current, the conversion factor Ki in the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage”...

  • Page 844: 2 ] Common Specifications

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter [ 2 ] Common specifications Item Details Control method AVR constant control with DC ACR minor Run, stop command, alarm reset command, digital inputs (X1, X2), power supply for PLC Digital input signal Control Digital output Transistor output (Y1, Y2, Y3), relay output (Y5A/Y5C), and batch alarm output (30A/30B/30C) Analog output...

  • Page 845: 3 ] Terminal Functions

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter [ 3 ] Terminal functions Terminal Specifications Type Symbol Function R, S, T Main power supply input Connect to a three-phase power supply via a dedicated reactor. P, N Converter output Connect to inverter power supply input terminals P and N. R0, T0 Control power auxiliary input These are backup terminals for the control power supply.
  • Page 846 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter ■ Protection and early warning functions Alarm name Display Operation details This function is activated if the AC current instantaneous value exceeds the overcurrent detection AC overcurrent level, such as when a power supply circuit short circuit or ground fault occurs. This function is activated if the AC power supply voltage drops to the undervoltage detection level or AC undervoltage below during converter operation.

  • Page 847: Device Configuration

    Note 1) Filter resistors (Rf) and charging resistors (RO) come in sets of three. For an order quantity of “1,” three items will be shipped. Note 2) Charging circuit contactors and fuses are products of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. 11-53...

  • Page 848: 2 ] Basic Connection Diagrams

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter [ 2 ] Basic connection diagrams Compact PWM converter (Note 1) Install the recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) to protect wiring on the PWM converter input (primary) side. Do not use a circuit breaker that exceeds the recommended rated current.
  • Page 849 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter 11.6.3 External Dimensions Figure A (Unit: mm) Power supply Type voltage Three-phase 200 V Three-phase 400 V Panel cutting drawing Figure B (Unit: mm) Power supply Type voltage Three-phase 200 V Three-phase 400 V Panel cutting drawing Figure C (Unit: mm)

  • Page 850: Peripheral Equipment

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter 11.6.4 Peripheral equipment ■ Boosting reactor BOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW BOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW BOTTOM VIEW Dimensions (mm) Boosting Converter type Figure reactor type (max) (±1) (±1)
  • Page 851 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter ■ Filter resistor Dimensions (mm) Approx. Converter type Filter resistor type weight (kg) (±2) (±2) (±0.5) (±0.5) (±0.3) (±0.2) (±2) RHC5.5C-2EJ RF80-0.42OHM 0.20 RHC7.5C-2EJ RHC11C-2EJ RF150-0.2OHM 0.28 RHC15C-2EJ RHC18.5C-2EJ RF200-0.13OHM 20.8 0.49 RHC22C-2EJ RHC5.5C-4EJ RF80-1.74OHM 0.20 RHC7.5C-4EJ...
  • Page 852 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter ■ Filter reactor BOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW BOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW Dimensions (mm) Approx. Filter reactor Converter type Figure weight type (kg) (max) (±1) (±1) (±5) (±5) (±1) (±5) (±5) (±5) RHC5.5C-2EJ LFC2C-7.5E...

  • Page 853: Filter Capacitor

    11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter ■ Filter capacitor Dimensions (mm) Approx. Converter type Filter capacitor type C’ C” weight (kg) (±3) (±7) (±2) (±3) (±4) (±5) RHC5.5C-2EJ CF2C-7.5E RHC7.5C-2EJ RHC11C-2EJ CF2C-15E RHC15C-2EJ RHC18.5C-2EJ CF2C-22E RHC22C-2EJ RHC5.5C-4EJ CF4C-7.5E RHC7.5C-4EJ RHC11C-4EJ CF4C-15E RHC15C-4EJ RHC18.5C-4EJ...
  • Page 854 11.6 Compact Power Regeneration PWM Converter ■ Charging resistor Dimensions (mm) Approx. Charging resistor Converter type weight type (kg) (±2) (±2) (±0.5) (±0.5) (±0.3) (±0.2) (±2) RHC5.5C-2EJ RHC7.5C-2EJ CR80-7.5OHM 0.20 RHC11C-2EJ RHC15C-2EJ RHC18.5C-2EJ CR120-2OHM 0.24 RHC22C-2EJ RHC5.5C-4EJ RHC7.5C-4EJ CR60-30OHM 0.11 RHC11C-4EJ RHC15C-4EJ RHC18.5C-4EJ...

  • Page 855: Dc Reactors (Dcrs)

    11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) 11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction (for reducing harmonic components). Please select a DC reactor according to the capacity of the applicable motor. For power supply matching •...
  • Page 856 11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) Table 11.7-1 DC reactors (DCRs) Standard Standard Power supply Rated current Inductance Generated loss applicable motor applicable motor DC reactor type voltage (mH) (kW) (HP) DCR2-0.2D DCR2-0.4D 0.75 DCR2-0.75D DCR2-1.5D DCR2-2.2D Three-phase DCR2-3.7D 200 V DCR2-5.5D DCR2-7.5 D DCR2-11 D DCR2-15 D...
  • Page 857 11.7 DC Reactors (DCRs) Figure A Figure B Figure C Table 11.7-2 DC reactors (DCRs) external dimensions Dimensions mm (inch) Power supply DC reactor Mass Figure Terminal voltage type kg (lb) Mounting hole (G) hole (J) DCR2-0.2D — (1.3) (2.6) (2.2) (3.4) (2.8)

  • Page 858: Ac Reactors (Acrs)

    11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) 11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example, in DC link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage waveform and power factor, or for power supply matching, but not for suppressing harmonic components in the power lines.
  • Page 859 11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) Table 11.8-1 AC reactor (ACR) Standard Reactance (mΩ/phase) Standard Power supply applicable Rated Coil resistance Generated applicable AC reactor type voltage motor current (A) (mΩ) loss (W) 50Hz 60Hz motor (HP) (kW) ACR2-0.4A 1100 0.75 ACR2-0.75A ACR2-1.5A ACR2-2.2A Three-phase...
  • Page 860 11.8 AC Reactors (ACRs) Figure A Figure B Terminal block (J screw) 6-terminal hole (J screw) 4-mounting hole 4-mounting hole (G screw) (G screw) Table 11.8-2 AC reactors (ACRs) external dimensions Dimensions mm (inch) Mass Power supply DC reactor Figure Terminal voltage type...
  • Page 861 11.9 Output Circuit Filters 11.9 Output Circuit Filters Insert an output circuit filter (OFL) in the inverter power output circuit to: • Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminals This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents from the 400 V class series of inverters.
  • Page 862 11.9 Output Circuit Filters OFL---4A ■ Filter (for 22 kW or below) ■ Reactor (for 30 kW or above) ■ Resistor and capacitor (for 30 kW or above) Figure D Dimensions [mm] (inch) Filter type Mounting Terminal Grounding Figure screw G screw H screw OFL-0.4-4A...

  • Page 863: Zero-Phase Reactors For Reducing Radio Noise (Acls)

    11.10 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) 11.10 Zero-phase Reactors for Reducing Radio Noise (ACLs) An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted from the inverter output wiring, and therefore inverter output wiring should be passed through the ACL. Pass all four wires including the three inverter output wires and grounding wire through the ACL in the same direction.
  • Page 864 11.11 External Cooling Attachments 11.11 External Cooling Attachments The use of an external cooling attachment for FRN0030E3S/N-2G to FRN0115E3S/N-2G and FRN0022E3S/N-4G to FRN0072E3S/N-4G allows cooling fins to project outside the paneling. This enhances cooling efficiency and allows the panel size to be reduced. It can emit approximately 70% of the inverter’s generated loss outside the paneling.
  • Page 865 11.11 External Cooling Attachments Panel mounting surface Panel cutting drawing Option type Applicable inverter type FRN0088E3S-2G / FRN0115E3S-2G FRN0088E3N-2G / FRN0115E3N-2G PB-F1-30 FRN0059E3S-4G / FRN0072E3S-4G FRN0059E3N-4G / FRN0072E3N-4G 11-71...
  • Page 866 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview The FRENIC-Ace (E3) is equipped with a dedicated adapter for installing adapter-equipped type option cards. Communication option cards cannot be installed on the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). 11.12.1 Adapter for option card installation This adapter is required to install a communication option card to the FRENIC-Ace (E3).
  • Page 867 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card (OPC-PDP3) By installing the PROFIBUS-DP communication card in FRENIC-Ace and connecting to the PROFIBUS-DP master device, run commands, frequency commands, and the operating status can be monitored, and all FRENIC-Ace function codes can be changed or referenced.
  • Page 868 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Function code settings To specify run commands and frequency commands from PROFIBUS, it is necessary to set inverter function codes. A list is shown in Table 11.12-5. Table 11.12-5 Function code settings required to enable run and frequency commands from PROFIBUS Function Factory Description...
  • Page 869 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Node address (1) Setting with rotary switches (SW1, SW2) The node address must be set before turning ON the PROFIBUS-DP communication card power. The node address is set using the rotary switches (SW1, SW2) on the communication card, and can be set from 1 to 99 in decimal notation.

  • Page 870: Canopen Specifications

    11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.3 CANopen communication card (OPC-COP2) By installing the CANopen communication card in FRENIC-Ace and connecting to CANopen, run commands and frequency commands can be set, and all FRENIC-Ace function codes can be accessed from the CANopen master (PC, PLC, etc.).
  • Page 871 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Other related function codes Other related function codes that can be set with CANopen communication are shown in the following table. Table 11.12-10 Factory Function code Function code name Data setting range Description default Operation when CANopen 0 to 15 communication error...
  • Page 872 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Communication This communication card is a CANopen follower, and supports the services shown in the following table. Table 11.12-12 Item Service Remarks RPDO x 3, TPDO x 3 PDO variable mapping can be changed. TPDO supports Sync, Cyclic, and Async.

  • Page 873: Devicenet Specifications

    78 m 156 m line length Messages supported 1. I/O messages (Poll, Change of State) 2. Explicit messages Vendor ID 319 (Registered name: Fuji Electric Group) Device type AC drive (Code: 2) Product code 9221 Applicable device profile AC Drive Number of input/output bytes Max.
  • Page 874 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview DIP switch settings The node address and data rate are set with DIP switches. (Refer to figure below.) The node address setting range is 0 to 63, and the data rate setting range is 125/250/500 kbit/s. Select the appropriate ranges with the DIP switches before turning ON the communication card power.
  • Page 875 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Function code settings Table 11.12-14 Function Factory Description Setting Remarks code default Communication compatibility 0: Disable mode 6: Enable (E1 compatibility) 7: Enable (E2 compatibility) Run, frequency command Select from the following. source selection Frequency Run command command...

  • Page 876: Communication Formats

    Basic I/O instance output (master → inverter) o31 = 21 or 0 Extension I/O instance output (initial value) o31 = 100 Fuji Electric original output o31 = 102 Data mapped I/O (write) o31 = 104 * Function code access request Input...

  • Page 877: Cc-Link Specifications

    11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.5 CC-Link communication card (OPC-CCL) CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) is an FA open field network system. Installing the CC-Link communication in the FRENIC-Ace and connecting to the CC-Link master unit with a dedicated cable supports a transmission speed of 156 kbps to 10 Mbps and total length of 100 to 1,200 m, allowing it to be used in a wide range of systems requiring high-speed or long-distance transmission, enabling a flexible system configuration.
  • Page 878 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Dedicated CC-Link function codes Table 11.12-18 Setting range Function code name Setting 0: Disable (factory default) Communication compatibility 0/6/7 6: Enable (E1 compatibility) mode 7: Enable (E2 compatibility) Run, frequency command 0 to 3 Select from the following.
  • Page 879 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.6 Multiprotocol Ethernet® Communication Card (OPC-CP-ETM) By installing the Multiprotocol Ethernet communication card on FRENIC-Ace (E3), and setting/monitoring run commands and frequency from a master device connected by Ethernet, function code settings required for operation can be changed and checked.
  • Page 880 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Table 11.12-20 (cont’d) Function Factory Description Setting code default Transmission error 0: Immediate Er5 trip when communication error occurs. (Operation selection) 1: Immediate Er5 trip after running for time specified with timer after communication error occurs. 2: Immediate Er5 trip if communication error occurs, and communication does not recover after retry while running for time specified with timer.
  • Page 881 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Function Factory Description Setting code default o299 Apply Ethernet settings 0: Initial value 1: The o201 to o284 (*2) setting values are applied to the network. (The value automatically returns to “0.”) 11-87...
  • Page 882 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Inverter function code settings (PROFINET-RT, EtherNet/IP) If accessing inverter function codes, specify the function code type (Table 11.12-21) and number with a 4-digit hexadecimal number as follows. However, these are ignored if the inverter has no function codes. (based on Table 11.12-21) Table 11.12-21 Function code type Type...

  • Page 883: Inverter Function Code Settings

    11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview (Modbus TCP) Inverter function code settings If accessing inverter function codes, specify the function code type (Table 11.12-22) and number with a 4-digit hexadecimal number as follows. However, these are ignored if the inverter has no function codes. (based on Table 11.12-22) Table 11.12-22 Function code type Type...
  • Page 884 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.7 Digital input/output interface card (OPC-DIO) Installing the digital input interface card to the FRENIC-Ace provides the following features. • Can set frequency with binary code (8- or 12-bit) or BCD code. • Can perform monitoring with binary code (8-bit). •...
  • Page 885 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Table 11.12-25 Input terminal connection methods Connection method SINK method SOURCE method Inverter DC24 to 27V DIO card SINK SOURCE I1～I13 Common DIO card SINK I1～I13 SOURCE Table 11.12-26 Output terminal connection methods O1～O8 11-91...

  • Page 886: Analog Interface Card (Opc-Aio)

    11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.8 Analog interface card (OPC-AIO) This is an optional card for adding analog inputs and outputs to FRENIC-Ace; it has the following features. • One analog voltage input (0 to ±10 V) • One analog current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA) •...
  • Page 887 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview Table 11.12-28 Connection methods Terminal Connection method name [32] [C2] Shielded line Variable resistor 1 to 5 kΩ Constant current source 4 to 20 mA [Ao] Shielded line [CS] Shielded line 11-93...
  • Page 888 11.12 Adapter-equipped Type Option Cards Overview 11.12.9 Relay output interface card (OPC-CP-RY) Three relay outputs (contact 1C) can be added by installing the relay output interface card (OPC-CP-RY) to the FRENIC-Ace (E3). Terminal functions Table 11.12-29 Terminal symbol Terminal name Functional description These relay contact outputs output the signals (running signals, [Y6A/Y6B/Y6C]...
  • Page 889 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options An option card can be built into the inverter main body by removing the control terminal block board from the inverter main body and installing the option card. These options cannot be installed on the Ethernet built-in type (E3N). Table 11.13-1 Type Name...

  • Page 890: Terminal Block Type Options

    11.13 Terminal Block Type Options 11.13.1 RS-485 communication card (OPC-CP-RS) The RS-485 communication card (OPC-CP-RS) is used in replacement of the standard screw terminal block board option of the FRENIC-Ace (E3). It provides two RJ-45 connectors for RS-485 communication with the FRENIC-Ace unit and allows easy multi-drop connection.
  • Page 891 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options 11.13.2 PG interface card (OPC-CP-PG3) This option card has two pulse (ABZ phase) input circuits corresponding to 12 V and 15 V, and a power supply output circuit for PG (pulse generator). By exchanging this option card with the control circuit terminal that is installed in FRENIC-Ace main body as a standard, the following expansion functions can be used.
  • Page 892 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options FRN-E3S/E3E L1/R L2/S L3/T OPC-CP-PG3 Pulse train generator 12Vdc±10% or　 15Vdc±10% ma x ma x 80mA 60mA Fig. 11.13-3 Command side (pulse string input interface) specifications Table 11.13-5 Output voltage switch, internal/external power supply selection jumper Symbol Name Specifications...
  • Page 893 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options Table 11.13-6 Terminal functions Terminal Function Symbol Name Specifications block Power supply Power supply output for external devices output Can output 12 V/15 V power. A phase Feedback pulse A-phase connection terminal input B phase Feedback pulse B-phase connection terminal input Feedback side...
  • Page 894 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options 11.13.3 PG interface card (OPC-CP-PG) This option card has two pulse (ABZ phase) input circuits corresponding to 12 V and 15 V, and a power supply output circuit for PG (pulse generator). By exchanging this option card with the control circuit terminal that is installed in FRENIC-Ace main body as a standard, the following expansion functions can be used.
  • Page 895 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options FRN-E3S/E3E L1/R L2/S L3/T OPC-CP-PG Pulse train generator 5Vdc±10% 200mA Fig. 11.13-4 Command side (pulse string input interface) specifications Table 11.13-9 Output voltage switch, internal/external power supply selection jumper Symbol Name Specifications It is possible to connect a device exceeding the internal current capacity to the PO terminal by connecting an external power supply to the PI terminal.
  • Page 896 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options Table 11.13-10 Terminal functions Terminal Function Symbol Name Specifications block Power supply Power supply output for external devices output Can output 5 V power. A phase input Feedback pulse A-phase connection terminal B phase input Feedback pulse B-phase connection terminal Feedback pulse Z-phase connection terminal Z-phase input...
  • Page 897 11.13 Terminal Block Type Options 11.13.4 Screw terminal block board option (E2S compatibility) (OPC-E2-TB1) This option is used to convert the push-type control terminal block to a screw-type terminal block, similar to that found on conventional Ace (E2) models. For details on terminal functions, refer to Chapter 2 “2.2.6 Control circuit terminals.” Terminal configuration Screw specifications, tightening torque, and recommended wire size Removal size...

  • Page 898: Keypad Options

    11.14 Keypad Options 11.14 Keypad Options Connecting the keypad options makes it possible to use more functions than with the keypad provided as standard. If performing remote operation, the keypad relay adapter and extension cable are required. Table 11.14-1 Type Name Function overview Refer to:...
  • Page 899 11.14 Keypad Options 11.14.1 Remote keypad (TP-E2) When used in combination with the FRENIC-Loader, the data items from the inverter unit can be saved into the keypad memory, making it possible to perform check operations anywhere. This keypad cannot be mounted directly to the FRENIC-Ace unit.
  • Page 900 11.14 Keypad Options 11.14.2 Multi-function keypad (TP-A2SW) Multi-function keypad TP-A2SW is equipped with an LCD screen with backlight, and displays data names and units in Japanese, English, Chinese, etc. This allows function codes and all internal data to be set and referenced in an easy-to-follow format.

  • Page 901: External Drawings

    11.14 Keypad Options External drawings (Panel surface) Panel inner side mm (inch) Part A in detail Screw length: L t + 6.6 < L < t + 11.6 Min. effective screw depth Pate thickness t + 66 Max. effective screw depth Plate thickness t + 11.6 Panel cutting drawing (Panel surface)

  • Page 902: Relay Connector

    11.14 Keypad Options 11.14.3 Keypad relay adapter (CBAD-CP) Use this relay adapter and a LAN cable to remotely connect the keypad to the FRENIC-Ace (E3). Relay connector Rear mounting adapter Extension cable for remote operation (CB-5S, CB-3S, CB-1S) or LAN cable Rear mounting adapter Relay connector コ...

  • Page 903: Extension Cable For Remote Operation

    11.14 Keypad Options 11.14.4 Extension Cable for Remote Operation This cable is used to connect the inverter unit RJ-45 connector with the keypad or USB-RS-485 converter, etc. The cable is available in lengths of 1 m, 3 m, and 5 m. All cables are straight type. Cable Table 11.14-2 Extension cable length for remote operation Type...
  • Page 905 Chapter 12 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the output ratings, input power, basic functions and other specifications of the FRENIC- Ace standard model. Contents 12.1 Basic type/Ethenet build-in type/EMC filter buit-in type ·················································· 12-1 12.1.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ··································································· 12-1 12.1.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ······························································...

  • Page 907: Basic Type/Ethenet Build-In Type/Emc Filter Buit-In Type

    12.1 Basic type 12.1 Basic type/Ethenet build-in type/EMC filter buit-in type 12.1.1 ND-mode inverters for general load ◼ Three-phase 400V class series Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-4G) Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-4G) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012 0022 0029 0037 0044...
  • Page 908 12.1 Basic type The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA (or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and %X is 5%. Obtained when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.

  • Page 909: Hd-Mode Inverters For Heavy Duty Load

    12.1 Basic type 12.1.2 HD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ◼ Three-phase 400V class series Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-4G) Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-4G) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3E-4G) 0.75 18.5 Nominal applied motor (kW)
  • Page 910 12.1 Basic type Average braking torque for the motor running alone. (It varies with the efficiency of the motor.) Voltage unbalance (%) = (Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V))/Three -phase average voltage (V) × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3) If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).

  • Page 911: Hnd-Mode Inverters For General Load

    12.1 Basic type 12.1.3 HND-mode inverters for general load Three-phase 200V class series (HND-mode) ◼ Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-2G) 0012 0020 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0030 0040 0056 0069 0088 0115 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-2G) (*10) (*10) 0.75...
  • Page 912 12.1 Basic type ◼ Three-phase 400V class series (HND-mode) Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-4G) Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N4G) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3E-4G) 0.75 18.5 Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] (Output rating) (*1) [1.5] [7.5]...
  • Page 913 12.1 Basic type Single-phase 200V class series (HND-mode) ◼ Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-7G) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-7G) (*10) (*10) (*10) (*10) (*10) (*10) 0.55 Nominal applied motor (kW) [HP] (Output rating) (*1) [1/4] [1/2] [3/4]...

  • Page 914: Hhd-Mode Inverters For Heavy Duty Load

    12.1 Basic type 12.1.4 HHD-mode inverters for heavy duty load ◼ Three-phase 200V class series (HHD-mode) Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-2G) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 0020 0030 0040 0056 0069 0088 0115 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-2G) 0.75 18.5 Nominal applied motor (kW)
  • Page 915 12.1 Basic type Three-phase 400V class series (HHD-mode) ◼ Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-4G) Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3E-4G) 0002 0004 0006 0007 0012 0022 0029 0037 0044 0059 0072 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-4G) Nominal applied motor (kW) 0.75 18.5 [HP] (Output rating) (*1)
  • Page 916 12.1 Basic type Voltage unbalance (%) = (Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V))/Three -phase average voltage (V) × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3) If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR). 12-10...
  • Page 917 12.1 Basic type ◼ Single-phase 200V class series (HHD-mode) Item Specification Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3S-7G) 0001 0002 0004 0006 0010 0012 Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3N-7G) Type (FRN_ _ _ _E3E-7G) 0001 0002 0003 0005 0008 0011 Nominal applied motor (kW) 0.75 [HP] [1/8]...

  • Page 918: Common Specifications

    12.2 Common Specifications 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-1 Item Description Remarks Maximum output 5 to 599 Hz variable frequency Base frequency 5 to 599 Hz variable Number of motor 2 to 128 poles poles setting 0.1 to 60.0 Hz variable Starting frequency (0.0 Hz under vector control (with or without sensor)) FRN***E3S/N-2G...
  • Page 919 12.2 Common Specifications Item Description Remarks • Speed Analog setting: ±0.2% of maximum frequency or below (at 25 control ±10 °C) (77±18 °F) range • Digital setting: ±0.01% of maximum frequency or below (at -10 to +50 °C) (14 to 122 °F) •...
  • Page 920 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-2 Item Description Remarks • The base frequency and maximum output frequency are common, and the voltage can be set between 80 and 240 V. • AVR control can be turned ON or OFF. 200 V series •...
  • Page 921 12.2 Common Specifications Item Description Remarks Frequency setting: Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an (*1) external signal (digital input). Remote/local switching, link switching Auxiliary frequency setting: Inputs at terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function) can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings.
  • Page 922 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-3 Item Description Remarks Pulse train input Pulse input = Terminal [X5], CW/CCW pulse, pulse + rotational (*2) (standard): direction Complementary output: Max. 100 kHz, Open collector output: Max. 30 kHz Frequency settings Pulse train input A PG option card is required.
  • Page 923 12.2 Common Specifications • Automatically reduces the frequency so that the output current becomes lower than the preset operation level. (This limiter can be canceled.) Software current limiter • The operation can be selected (operation at constant speed only, operation when accelerating and at constant speed).
  • Page 924 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-4 Item Description Remarks • PID processor for process control/dancer control • Normal operation/inverse operation • PID command: Keypad, analog input (from terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function) and [C1] (V2 function)), multistep frequency (3 steps), RS- 485 communication, field bus communication •...
  • Page 925 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-5 Item Description Remarks Speed control • Selectable among the four set of the auto speed regulator (ASR) parameters. • Notch filter for vibration control Line speed control In a machine such as winder/unwinder, regulates the motor speed to keep the (*2) peripheral speed of the spool constant.
  • Page 926 12.2 Common Specifications Table 12.2-6 Item Description Remarks Speed monitor (reference frequency, output frequency, motor speed, load shaft (*1) speed, feeding speed(line speed), and speed indication with percent), output current (A), output voltage (V), calculated torque (%), input power (kW), PID command value, PID feedback amount, PID output, load factor (%), and motor output (kW), Running/stopping Torque current [%] , Magnetic flux command [%], Analog input monitor, input watt-...

  • Page 927: External Dimensions

    Chapter 13 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS This chapter gives external dimensions of the inverter. Contents 13.1 Basic Type ········································································································· 13-1 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type ··························································································· 13-7 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type ······················································································ 13-13 13.4 Keypad (CBAD-CP: When keypad rear cover is attached)·········································· 13-20 24A7-E-0174a...

  • Page 929: Basic Type

    13.1 Basic Type 13.1 Basic Type External dimension drawings for each inverter capacity are shown below. * Models FRN0030E3S/N-2G/FRN0022E3S/N-4G and above can be installed with an optional external cooling attachment, where the cooling fins protrude outside the equipment or cabinet. Dimensions for cutting the paneling to install external cooling are shown on the bottom right of the figures for these models.
  • Page 930 13.1 Basic Type Figure B Oblong hole (Unit: mm (inch)) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0010E3S-2G 156 (6.14) 98 (3.86) 58 (2.28) Three-phase 200 V FRN0012E3S-2G 156 (6.14) 98 (3.86) 58 (2.28) FRN0002E3S-4G 132 (5.2) 98 (3.86) 34 (1.34) FRN0004E3S-4G 156 (6.14)
  • Page 931 13.1 Basic Type Figure C (Unit: mm (inch)) Power supply Inverter type voltage Three-phase FRN0020E3S-2G 200 V Three-phase FRN0012E3S-4G 400 V Single-phase FRN0012E3S-7G 200 V 13-3...
  • Page 932 13.1 Basic Type Figure D (7.17) (Unit: mm (inch)) (6.46) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0030E3S-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0040E3S-2G FRN0022E3S-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0029E3S-4G (5.94) (6.85) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-4...
  • Page 933 13.1 Basic Type Figure E (Unit: mm (inch)) (8.74) (7.72) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0056E3S-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0069E3S-2G FRN0037E3S-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0044E3S-4G (6.85) (8.43) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-5...
  • Page 934 13.1 Basic Type Figure F (Unit: mm (inch)) (9.92) (8.9) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0088E3S-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0115E3S-2G FRN0059E3S-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0072E3S-4G (8.07) (9.57) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-6...

  • Page 935: Ethernet Built-In Type

    13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure A (Unit: mm (inch)) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0001E3N-2G 98 (3.86) 90 (3.54) 8 (0.31) FRN0002E3N-2G 98 (3.86) 90 (3.54) 8 (0.31) Three-phase 200 V FRN0004E3N-2G 113 (4.45) 90 (3.54) 23 (0.91)
  • Page 936 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure B (Unit: mm (inch)) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0010E3N-2G 156 (6.14) 98 (3.86) 58 (2.28) Three-phase 200 V FRN0012E3N-2G 156 (6.14) 98 (3.86) 58 (2.28) FRN0002E3N-4G 132 (5.2) 98 (3.86) 34 (1.34) FRN0004E3N-4G 156 (6.14)
  • Page 937 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure C (Unit: mm (inch)) Power supply Inverter type voltage Three-phase FRN0020E3N-2G 200 V Three-phase FRN0012E3N-4G 400 V Single-phase FRN0012E3N-7G 200 V 13-9...
  • Page 938 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure D (Unit: mm (inch)) (7.17) (6.46) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0030E3N-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0040E3N-2G FRN0022E3N-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0029E3N-4G (5.94) (6.85) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-10...
  • Page 939 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure E (8.74) (Unit: mm (inch)) (7.72) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0056E3N-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0069E3N-2G FRN0037E3N-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0044E3N-4G (6.85) (8.43) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-11...
  • Page 940 13.2 Ethernet Built-in Type Figure F (Unit: mm (inch)) (9.92) (8.9) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0088E3N-2G Three-phase 200 V FRN0115E3N-2G FRN0059E3N-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0072E3N-4G (8.07) (9.57) (Panel cutting drawing) 13-12...

  • Page 941: Emc Filter Built-In Type

    13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure A (Unit: mm (inch)) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch) Power Inverter type supply voltage FRN0001E3E-7G 125 (4.92) 117 (4.61) 8 (0.31) Single- FRN0002E3E-7G 125 (4.92) 117 (4.61) 8 (0.31) phase 200 V FRN0003E3E-7G 140 (5.51) 117 (4.61)
  • Page 942 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure B (Unit: mm (inch)) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch) Power Inverter type supply voltage FRN0002E3E-4G 175 (6.89) 141 (5.55) 34 (1.34) Three-phase 400 V FRN0004E3E-4G 199 (7.83) 141 (5.55) 58 (2.28) 13-14...
  • Page 943 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure C (Unit: mm (inch)) Power Inverter type supply voltage Single- FRN0005E3E-7G phase 200 V 13-15...
  • Page 944 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure D (Unit: mm (inch)) Power Inverter type supply voltage FRN0006E3E-4G Three-phase FRN0007E3E-4G 400 V FRN0012E3E-4G FRN0008E3E-7G Single- phase 200 V FRN0011E3E-7G 13-16...
  • Page 945 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure E (Unit: mm (inch)) Power supply Inverter type voltage FRN0022E3E-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0029E3E-4G 13-17...
  • Page 946 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure F (Unit: mm (inch)) Power Inverter type supply voltage FRN0037E3E-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0044E3E-4G 13-18...
  • Page 947 13.3 EMC Filter Built-in Type Figure G (Unit: mm (inch)) Power Inverter type supply voltage FRN0059E3E-4G Three-phase 400 V FRN0072E3E-4G 13-19...

  • Page 948: Keypad (Cbad-Cp: When Keypad Rear Cover Is Attached)

    13.4 Keypad (CBAD-CP: When keypad rear cover is attached) 13.4 Keypad (CBAD-CP: When keypad rear cover is attached) (Unit: mm (inch)) When operating the keypad remotely or mounting it in a panel (Keypad rear cover attached) Panel cutting dimensions drawing (view A) *The keypad rear cover is optional.
  • Page 949 APPENDIX Contents Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) ···························Appendix-1 A.1 Effect of inverters on other devices ······························································Appendix-1 A.1.1 Effect on AM radios ············································································Appendix-1 A.1.2 Effect on telephones ···········································································Appendix-1 A.1.3 Effect on pressure sensors ··································································Appendix-1 A.1.4 Effect on position detectors (pulse encoders) ···········································Appendix-1 A.1.5 Effect on proximity switches ·································································Appendix-1 A.2 Noise ····································································································Appendix-2...

  • Page 950: Compliance With European Standards

    Appendix F Conformity with Standards ································································ Appendix-22 F.1 Compliance with European standards ( ) ··············································· Appendix-22 F.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards ························································· Appendix-23 F.1.2 Compliance with European Low Voltage Directive ··································· Appendix-27 F.2 Harmonic component regulations in EU ······················································ Appendix-35 F.2.1 General comments ···········································································...

  • Page 951: Appendix A Trouble-Free Use Of Inverters (Notes On Electrical Noise)

    Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Excerpt from technical material of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (JEMA) (March 1995) Effect of inverters on other devices The applicable fields in which inverters are used have been rapidly expanding. This paper describes the effect that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures.

  • Page 952: Noise

    Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Noise This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to noise. A.2.1 Inverter operating principles and noise Fig. A.2-1 shows an Outline of inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC (rectification) in a converter unit and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage and variable frequency.

  • Page 953: Types Of Noise

    Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) A.2.2 Types of noise Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor. The various propagation routes are shown in Fig.

  • Page 954: Measures

    Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Power source Inverter Electronic equipment Signal line Sensor Fig. A.2-5 Electrostatic induction noise (3) Radiated noise Noise generated in an inverter radiates through the air with input side and output side main circuit wires, and ground wires acting as antennas;...
  • Page 955 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Table A.3-1 Noise prevention measures Goal of noise Propagation prevention measures route Noise prevention method Separate main circuit from control circuit Minimize wiring length Avoid parallel and bundled wiring Wiring and Use appropriate grounding installation Use shielded wire and twisted shielded wire...
  • Page 956 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) What follows are noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration. (1) Wiring and grounding As shown in Fig. A.3-1, separate the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring as far as possible regardless of whether they are located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter.
  • Page 957 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) (3) Anti-noise devices To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main circuit wiring to the air, a line filter and power supply transformer should be used (refer to Fig. A.3-4). Line filters are classified into simple-type filters (including capacitive filters to be connected in parallel to a power line, and inductive filters to be connected in series to a power line) and authentic filters (LC filters) to address radio noise restrictions.

  • Page 958: Noise Prevention Examples

    Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) A.3.3 Noise prevention examples Table A.3-2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter. Table A.3-2 Examples of noise prevention measures No. Target device Phenomenon Measure Notes AM radio...
  • Page 959 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Table A.3-2 Examples of noise prevention measures (cont’d) No. Target device Phenomenon Measure Notes Telephone When driving a ventilation fan with an 1) Connect the ground terminals of 1) The effect of the inverter, noise enters a telephone in a the motors in a common inductive filter and LC...
  • Page 960 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Table A.3-2 Examples of noise prevention measures (continued) No. Target device Phenomenon Measure Notes Photoelectric A photoelectric relay malfunctioned 1) Insert a 0.1 μF capacitor between 1) If a low-current circuit relay when the inverter runs the motor.
  • Page 961 Appendix A Trouble-free Use of Inverters (Notes on Electrical Noise) Table A.3-2 Examples of noise prevention measures (cont’d) Target device Phenomenon Measure Notes Position Erroneous-pulse outputs from a pulse 1) Install an LC filter and a capacitive 1) This is an example of detector (pulse converter caused a shift in the stop filter on the input side of the...

  • Page 962: Effect On Insulation Of General-Purpose Motors Driven With 400 V Class Inverters

    Appendix B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters Appendix B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters Excerpt from technical material of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (JEMA) (March 1995) Preface When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals.

  • Page 963: Effect Of Surge Voltages

    Appendix B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters A measured example in Fig. B.1-2 illustrates the relation of the peak value of the motor terminal voltage with the wiring length between the inverter and the motor. From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.

  • Page 964: Using Motors With Enhanced Insulation

    Appendix B Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters B.3.2 Using motors with enhanced insulation Enhanced insulation of a motor’s winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved. Regarding existing equipment B.4.1 In case of a motor being driven with 400 V-series inverter A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge voltage condition of over 1,100 V, and most of the damage occurs within several months after commissioning the inverter.

  • Page 965: Appendix C Inverter Generating Loss

    Appendix C Inverter Generating Loss Appendix C Inverter Generating Loss The table below lists the inverter generating loss. Table C-1 Carrier frequency (Function code: F26) HND specification HHD specification Inverter type specification specification Factory Factory Factory Maximum Factory Maximum default default default set value...
  • Page 966 Appendix C Inverter Generating Loss Note 1) The maximum set value (max. carrier) differs depending on specifications. For details, refer to Chapter 5 “5.3.1 F codes (Fundamental functions)/FUNCTION CODE F26.” Note 2: When HD/ND specification units are operated at maximum carrier, perform derating of the output current while referring to Chapter 10 “10.4.2 Guidelines for selecting inverter drive mode and capacity.”...

  • Page 967: Appendix D Conversion To Non-Si Units

    Appendix D Conversion to Non-SI Units Appendix D Conversion to Non-SI Units All expressions given in Chapter 10 “SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES” are based on SI units (The International System of Units). This section explains how to convert expressions to other units. Conversion of units Force Inertia constant...

  • Page 968: Calculation Formulas

    Appendix D Conversion to Non-SI Units Calculation formulas Torque, power, rotation speed Acceleration torque 2π [Driving mode]  • P[W] ∙ N[min ]·τ[N∙m] J [kg·m ΔN [min  • · τ [N·m] 9.55 Δt [s]·η  • P [W] 1.026∙N [min ]·T [kgf∙m] [kg·m ΔN [min...

  • Page 969: Appendix E Permissible Current Of Insulated Wires

    Appendix E Permissible Current of Insulated Wires Appendix E Permissible Current of Insulated Wires The tables below list the permissible current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wires. ■ IV wire (maximum permissible temperature: 60C (140°F)) Table E-1 (a) Permissible current of insulated wires Permissible Aerial wiring...
  • Page 970 Appendix E Permissible Current of Insulated Wires ■ HIV wire (maximum permissible temperature: 75C (167°F)) Table E-1 (b) Permissible current of insulated wires Permissible Aerial wiring Wire duct wiring (3 wires or less in same duct) Wire current size Threshold 35°C 40°C 45°C...
  • Page 971 Appendix E Permissible Current of Insulated Wires ■ 600 V crosslinked polyethylene insulated wire (maximum permissible temperature: 90C (194°F)) Table E-3 (c) Permissible current of insulated wires Permissible Aerial wiring Wire duct wiring (3 wires or less in same duct) current Wire size Threshold...

  • Page 972: Conformity With Standards

    Appendix F Conformity with Standards Appendix F Conformity with Standards Compliance with European standards ( The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive, Low Voltage Directive, and Machinery Directive issued by the Council of the European Communities.

  • Page 973: Compliance With Emc Standards

    Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.1.1 Compliance with EMC standards The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE-marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive. Therefore, CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer.
  • Page 974 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Table F.1-2 EMC-compliant filters Filter type Power Inverter type system ND mode HD mode HND mode HHD mode FRN0001E3□-2G FRN0002E3□-2G B84243A8008W000 B84243A8008W000 FRN0004E3□-2G FRN0006E3□-2G FRN0010E3□-2G FRN0012E3□-2G B84243A8033W000 B84243A8033W000 Three- FRN0020E3□-2G phase 200 V FRN0030E3□-2G FN3258T-75-34 FN3258T-75-34 FRN0040E3□-2G FN3258T-75-34...
  • Page 975 Appendix F Conformity with Standards ■ Recommended installation method To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive, certified technicians should install and wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below. EMC-compliant filter (option) installation method 1) Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate.
  • Page 976 Appendix F Conformity with Standards ■ Leakage current of EMC-filter built-in type inverters An EMC filter uses grounding capacitors for noise suppression. The use of grounding capacitors leads to an increase in leakage current, and therefore a check should be carried out to ensure that the power supply system has not been affected.
  • Page 977 Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.1.2 Compliance with European Low Voltage Directive General-purpose inverters are subject to compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive. The CE marking on inverters represents a self-declaration that the product complies with the Low Voltage Directive. ■...
  • Page 978 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Compliance with European Low Voltage Directive (cont’d) Standard applicable Power system Inverter type Specification Fuse rating (A) motor (kW) FRN0002E3□-4G 50(IEC 60269-4) 0.75 FRN0004E3□-4G 50(IEC 60269-4) FRN0006E3□-4G 50(IEC 60269-4) FRN0007E3□-4G 63(IEC 60269-4) FRN0012E3□-4G 63(IEC 60269-4) FRN0022E3□-4G 100(IEC 60269-4) Three-phase...
  • Page 979 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Note) The □ in the inverter type is replaced by a letter of the alphabet (S, E, N) indicating the type. Note) The ■ in the inverter type is replaced by a letter of the alphabet (S, N) indicating the type. Disconnect Disconnect 切断器...
  • Page 980 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Compliance with European Low Voltage Directive (cont’d) Molded case circuit Residual-current-operated device/earth leakage breaker (MCCB) *1 circuit breaker (RCD / ELCB) *1 Standard Power Rated current Rated current applicable Inverter type Maximum system Sensitivity With Without With Without...
  • Page 981 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Note) The □ in the inverter type is replaced by a letter of the alphabet (S, E, N) indicating the type. Note) The ■ in the inverter type is replaced by a letter of the alphabet (S, N) indicating the type. *1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) will vary, depending on the power transformer capacity.
  • Page 982 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Compliance with European Low Voltage Directive (cont’d) Recommended wire size (mm Main terminal *1 Main power supply input Grounding for Braking Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, inverter [ ] *2 Inverter reactor resistor L3/T] output [U, V, connectio connectio n [P1,...
  • Page 983 Appendix F Conformity with Standards *2 Only one wire with a recommended size can be connected to a ground terminal. The wire size in parentheses indicates the ground wire. 10. An IEC61800-5-1 5.2.3.6.3 Short-circuit Current Test has been carried out on this inverter under the following conditions.
  • Page 984 Goethering 58, 63067 Offenbach / Main, Germany <Precaution when exporting to Europe> ● Not all Fuji Electric products in Europe are necessarily imported by the above importer. If any Fuji Electric products are exported to Europe via another importer, please ensure that the importer is clearly stated by the customer.
  • Page 985 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Harmonic component regulations in EU F.2.1 General comments When you use general-purpose industrial inverters in the EU, the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below. If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to a public low-voltage power supply, it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines (with the exception of industrial low-voltage power lines).
  • Page 986 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Note 1) Evaluated by the level of harmonics flow to the 400 VAC line when three-phase 200 VAC power is supplied from the three-phase 400 VAC power supply via a step-down transformer. Note 2) A box () in the above table replaces S (Basic type) or N (Ethernet type) or E (EMC filter built-in type) depending on the enclosure.
  • Page 987 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Compliance with UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) F.3.1 General comments UL standards (Underwriters Laboratories Inc. standards) are North American safety standards used to prevent fire and other such accidents, and offer protection to users, service technicians, and the general public. cUL indicates that products which comply with CSA standards are certified by UL.
  • Page 988 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) 1. Motor overload protection (electronic thermal overload relay) is provided in each model. Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level, referring to the descriptions below. Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 (Select motor characteristics)
  • Page 989 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) 7. Environmental Requirements The table below applies to FRN△△△E3□ -○G. (△ indicates inverter capacity, □: Indicates type* ○: Indicates the series 2, 4, or 7.) *□：S, N, or E ■：S or N Open type Open type Enclosed type*...
  • Page 990 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) 9. Install UL certified protection devices between the power supply and the inverter, referring to the table below. Short circuit current rating (SCCR) 100 kA Inverse time circuit Semiconductor fuse Cat No.
  • Page 991 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) Short circuit current rating (SCCR) 100kA Inverse time circuit Class CC,J,T,L fuse Semiconductor fuse Cat No. breaker Inverter type Manufacturer: Manufacturer: Maximum Current Maximum Current Bussmann Mersen （A）...
  • Page 992 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) 10. Refer to the table below for field wiring. Required torque lb-in (N・m) Wire size AWG (mm Main terminal Cu Wire [L1/R], [L2/S] , [L3/T] [U], [V], [W] Inverter type FRN0001E3□-2G (2.1)
  • Page 993 Appendix F Conformity with Standards UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) compatibility (cont’d) Required torque Wire size AWG (mm lb-in (N・m) Main terminal Cu Wire [L1/R], [L2/S], [L3/T] [U], [V], [W] Inverter type FRN0002E3□-4G HND/HD/ND (2.1) 0.75 HND/HD FRN0004E3□-4G 15.9 10.6 (2.1)
  • Page 994 F.4.1 General comments With FRENIC-Ace Series, the motor coasts to a stop by turning OFF (opening) the connection between terminals [EN1] - [PLC] or [EN2] - [PLC]. This is a safe shutdown function (STO) of Cat. 0 (uncontrolled stop) specified in EN 60204-1 and complies with the functional safety standards.
  • Page 995 Appendix F Conformity with Standards Enable terminals, peripheral circuits and internal circuit configuration FRENIC-Ace Inverter IGBT output Safety component acc. EN ISO 13849-1 Cat.3 PL:e EN62061,EN61508 SIL3 [L1/R] Power [L2/S] Diagnosis supply [L3/T] [PLC] [EN1] IGBT [EN2] driver Emergency stop Fig.

  • Page 996: Safety Requirements

    Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.4.2 Notes for compliance with functional safety standards 1) Safety requirements All of the following requirements must be met in order to comply with functional safety. 1-1) Installation - Turn off both SW9 switches on the control PCB. - Install the inverter in a cabinet with a protective enclosure of IP54 or higher.
  • Page 997 Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.4.3 Inverter output status when STO is activated A STO condition occurs in the inverter when terminals [EN1] and [EN2] are turned OFF. Fig. F.4-2 shows the inverter output status when terminals [EN1] and [EN2] are turned OFF while the inverter is stopped.
  • Page 998 Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.4.4 eCf alarm and inverter-output status FRENIC-Ace monitors the logical discrepancy of the signal input to the terminals [EN1] and [EN2], and continuously diagnoses the failure of the safety circuit. Fig. F.4-4 shows the timing chart for the eCf alarm following a terminal [EN1] or [EN2] input mismatch. A STO condition occurs in the inverter when terminals [EN1] and [EN2] are turned OFF.
  • Page 999 Appendix F Conformity with Standards F.4.5 Precautions for releasing STO If the terminals [EN1] and [EN2] are turned OFF during inverter operation, the inverter forcibly coasts to a stop. After that, if [EN1] and [EN2] are turned ON with the operation command being input, the inverter restarts the output. Be careful when resetting the safety components.

  • Page 1000: Compliance With The Radio Waves Act (South Korea)

    (△: is filled with inverter output power and □: is also for what power supply voltage 2 or 4 or 7 is.) (Products without standard indication are not applicable.) Applicant: Fuji Electric Korea Equipment Name: Inverter Country of Origin: Described on the nameplate Date of Manufacture: Described on the nameplate Manufacturer: Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. Appendix -50...
  • Page 1001 Be sure to change the connection method. Applicable inverters Table G.1-1 Applicable inverter (before change) Replacement inverter (after change) <FRENIC5000G11S series> FRENIC-Ace series • FRN30G11S-2, FRN30P11S-2 inverter or higher (FRENIC-MEGA series) • FRN30G11S-4, FRN30P11S-4 inverter or higher (FRENIC-VG series) (FRENIC-Eco series) <FRENIC-VG7S series>...
  • Page 1002 Appendix G Inverter Replacement Precautions (When Using PWM Converter (RHC Series)) Changing the connection method (inverter control power auxiliary input terminals (R0, T0)) RHC series: if using ■ RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C, ■ RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C Applicable inverter (before change) connection diagram Charge circuit box Converter Inverter...
  • Page 1003 Appendix G Inverter Replacement Precautions (When Using PWM Converter (RHC Series)) RHC series: If using when ■ RHC280-4C to RHC630-4C, ■ RHC400-4C VT specifications apply If using ■ RHC500B to RHC800B-4C Applicable inverter (before change) connection diagram Converter Inverter L1/R P(+) P(+) L2/S...
  • Page 1006 Second Edition January 2025 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. ● No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. ● The content of this manual may be subject to change without notice.
  • Page 1008 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 141-0032, Japan Phone: +81 3 5435 7058 Fax: +81 3 5435 7420 URL www.fujielectric.com/ 2025-01（A25a/L23）MS 00 FOLS...

This manual is also suitable for:

Frn0001e3 -2g seriesFrn0002e3 -2g seriesFrn0004e3 -2g seriesFrn0006e3 -2g seriesFrn0010e3 -2g seriesFrn0012e3 -2g series ... Show all

Table of Contents